You are on page 1of 202

USABCO 9.1 and 9.

2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Introduction
Release Highlights (Applications)

Overview of Applications Release 9.1 Update 2 [280 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9.1 Update 2 features innovative solutions focused on mobility,
industry, and user productivity. Added smartphone and tablet applications deliver role based solutions to
meet the needs of mobile users within your organization. Update 2 delivers many enhancements that
provide deep vertical industry solutions focused on manufacturing and distribution, consumer goods,
projects and service, and asset intensive industries.

Usability and productivity enhancements are found throughout the applications and business processes
such as new capabilities to support automation of the voucher match process.

A few examples of Release 9.1 Update 2 enhancements that demonstrate JD Edwards' continued
commitment to these initiatives follow:

•Mobile Service Time Entry


•Speed Case Entry Tablet application
•Warehouse Management Tablet application
•Warehouse Management One View Reporting
•Real Estate Management Unit Attributes
•Health and Safety Incident Management module (previously announced)
•Automated Inventory to G/L Reconciliation
•One View drill back capabilities to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Summary Industry:

Usability Enhancements Overview [290 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne continues with its focus on improving the user experience. The focus for
this set of enhancements is two-fold:

- Enhance targeted applications to adhere to a consistent user interface standard

- Enhance targeted applications to address specific usability improvement opportunities

Improvements in

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 1 of 202
- Financials
- Capital Asset Management
- Project Management
- Transportation Management
- Warehouse Management
- Procurement
- Supplier Self Service
- Demand Scheduling Execution
- Human Resources Management

Please see specific product areas for more details.


Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Summary Industry:
Benefits: - Consistent user experience across applications in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
- Improved efficiency
- Improved user experience

Introduction [300 : 21-Jun-2018]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9.2 provides transformational business solutions for customer to
address the demands of the digital economy. Innovative new JD Edwards solutions are facilitating
SMART (Strategic, Mobile, Architected for Real-Time) change.

JD Edwards continues to invest in functionality that creates a competitive advantage for customers in
our focus industries. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 9.2 delivers new strategic products for the projects,
consumer goods, and manufacturing and distribution industries.

Advanced Job Forecasting delivers key capabilities for project-focused industries such as engineering
and construction. Advanced Job Forecasting provides project managers with significant new capabilities
to capture and audit the expected detail labor and material expenses remaining on a project. The
forecast can include anticipated material quantities and material cost changes as well as specific skill
sets and pay levels required for remaining job phases. This new product provides several new forecast
calculation methods and the ability to create user-defined calculations. Furthermore, users can save and
compare multiple forecasts (what-if scenarios) and store audit trails of forecasted versus actual factors.

Outbound Inventory Management optimizes inventory performance and significantly reduces the
business complexity for suppliers in the consumer goods, manufacturing and distribution industries
providing vendor-managed or consignment inventory services for their customers. Outbound Inventory
Management manages the complete VMI/Consignment lifecycle from defining agreements through
ordering, shipments, invoicing and replenishments, supporting stronger customer collaboration, reduced
customer stock-outs, and improved forecast accuracy. These capabilities result in increased customer
loyalty which translates to improved supplier profitability.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Rental Management provides strategic visibility into inventory and
equipment availability and supports high levels of customer service while effectively managing revenue
and expenses for each rental contract. Rental Management has been enhanced to support more
complex global business requirements as well as process automation and simplification.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Work Center Load Review Calendar provides daily, weekly, and monthly
calendar views of scheduled work center resources with a real-time view into remaining available
capacity. The application displays over and under-capacity conditions in an intuitive graphical format and
provides drill-down options to make decisions and changes more quickly and easily.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 2 of 202
One View Financial Statements is a new feature of the One View Reporting for Financials module. This
feature allows financial system end-users to create financial statements such as balance sheets and
income statements, through a very user-friendly application interface.

Oracle's JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications continue to empower the mobile
workforce with new applications that accelerate business execution on their device of choice. There are
more than 80 mobile applications for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne available out-of-the box on Apple's App
Store, Google Play, and as Archives on the Update Center. In addition, the Oracle Mobile Application
Framework and the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Application Interface Services (AIS) Server give
customers the ability to extend or create new mobile applications.

To gain an overview of the enhancements available in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications 9.2
release, use the Release Comparison function to retrieve all the features that have been released since
the 9.1 Update 2 release.

Change: Added in Release 9.2


Status: Available Type: Summary Industry:
Notes: The attached links provide access to additional information sources.

Outbound Inventory Management [320 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system is an integral part of the
supply chain and order management processes. It works with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Inventory
Management and Sales Order Management systems to manage consigned and vendor-managed
inventory suppliers produce and ship to their customers.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Planned Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution

Release Information [330 : 10-Nov-2017]


Applications Release 9.2 Update 2 is a cumulative update that contains all Application patches,
certifications, localizations, regulatory and ERP enhancements that have been delivered since the
release of Applications 9.2 in October 2015 up through enhancements released in October 2017.

Applications 9.2 Update 2 simplifies the upgrade process to the Release 9.2 code line by allowing
customers to apply all changes in a single update, as well as allow customers currently on Release 9.2
to stay current with all changes since the GA of Release 9.2 in October 2015.

For information about supported features, see the list of features in each Applications 9.2 release
starting from October 2015 through October 2017.

For more information about accessing this release, see article 2321209.1 on My Oracle Support.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Table Definition Inquiry [340 : 24-Jun-2021]


JD Edwards plans to deliver a simplified method for viewing detailed table definitions for EnterpriseOne
tables including columns, primary index, sequence, and data dictionary properties. Business Analysts,
developers and power users will not need to use the design tool to understand table information and

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 3 of 202
design specifications.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2018)
Status: Available Type: Technology Industry:
Benefits: This new application will simplify learning and speed up research and problem resolution.

Release Information [400 : 04-Jan-2024]


Applications Release 9.2 Update 8 is a cumulative update that contains all Application patches,
certifications, localizations, regulatory, and ERP enhancements that have been delivered since the
release of Applications 9.2 Update 7 in November 2022 up through enhancements released in
November 2023. Applications 9.2 Update 8 simplifies the upgrade process to the Release 9.2 Update 7
code line by allowing customers to apply all changes in a single update, as well as allows customers
currently on Release 9.2 Update 7 to stay current with all changes since the availability of Release 9.2
Update 7 in November 2022. For information about supported features, see the list of features in the
Applications 9.2 release starting from November 2022 through November 2023. For more information
about accessing this release, see article 2993064.1 on My Oracle Support.
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?id=2993064.1

To download all the Electronic Software Updates (ESUs) pertaining to this release, use the following
query on Change Assistant:
9.2 Update 8.

Use this link to install Change Assistant: https://updatecenter.oracle.com/apps/WebSearch/download.


jsp?pkgName=ChangeAssistant.html&pkgType=70&pkgPlatform=70
Visit My Oracle Support for FAQ on Change Assistant: Document ID 1057524.1
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?id=1057524.1
Change: Feature in both (Not Added or Deprecated)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:DECEMBER 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 4 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Project Management
Contract and Service Billing

Revenue Recognition [190 : 11-May-2023]


The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) created a joint standard regarding the recognition of revenue. This standard will be effective for
the first quarterly report in the first annual period beginning after December 15, 2017 ( for public
companies) and after December 15, 2018 (for non-public companies). Organizations may choose to
adopt the new standard one year earlier that these dates.

This feature enhances existing processes and adds a new feature for Accounts Receivable to enable
users to abide by the new five step process for revenue recognition:

1. Identify the contract with the customer


2. Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract
3. Determine the transaction price
4. Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations
5. Recognize revenue as separate performance obligations are satisfied

This feature affects all products that recognize revenue including Accounts Receivable, Sales Order
Management, Advanced Contract Billing, Contract and Service Billing, and Project Costing.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This feature enables users to be compliant with the new standard for recognition of revenue
that was published by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International
Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

Additional Search Fields in Contract Master [200 : 01-Jul-2021]


Within the Contract Master (P5201), you can now search for contracts based on the following
information: Biller, PM (User Defined Address 1), Billing Frequency, Billing Cycle, Billing Group, and
Status.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 5 of 202
Benefits: Adding these fields to the QBE allows users to quickly access contracts based on how a
company runs its business such as contracts by a specific biller and/or PM, by billing cycle, to name a
few. The biller assignments on the contract master are very important as the contract master is the
driver for creating invoices and it is important to know which contracts are assigned to which billers. This
new functionality, eliminates the need to write down the contract numbers for which a biller or PM is
responsible.

Blank and Wildcard Account Ranges in Markup Table [210 : 01-Jul-2021]


You can use blank and wildcard account ranges when setting up a markup table using the Billing
Rate/Markup Table program (P48096).
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: - Minimizes setup time to define markup rules
- Provides consistency in the way markup rules are set up compared to other parts of Contract and
Service Billing
- Ensures contract compliance with markup rules are automatically applied across contracts
Examples: A company may have a policy to consistently apply a specific markup for engineering
services for all of their contracts. With the ability to specify one markup rule and a wildcard in the Object
Account, the company can be sure that the same markup is applied to any existing and new contracts
without having to explicitly create a separate markup for every account for each contract.

Ability to Process Zero Dollar Invoice in Contract and Service Billing [220 : 02-Nov-2021]
The Contract and Service Billing process has been improved to allow zero dollar invoices to be created
in the Accounts Receivable system for zero dollar billable contracts and service work orders by
providing a new processing option in the Journal Generation and Create AR Entries batch program. This
change eliminates the gaps in invoice numbers for VAT reporting and ensures compliance with
regulatory requirements.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Project Costing

Project Costing Usability [30 : 11-May-2023]


The Job Status Inquiry application is one of the primary applications a project manager uses to gain
insite into the general health and status of a project. As part of the continued commitment to improve
the usability of our applications, the Job Status Inquiry was enhanced to ease the navigation and
general usabiltiy of the application. Other changes to this application include removal of navigation
buttons to free up more space for the grid.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - Improved efficiencies
- More consistent user experience across the enterprise
- Less vertical scrolling

Job Status Inquiry Performance Improvement [500 : 11-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 6 of 202
Continue to improve performance in Job Status Inquiry (JSI) application. Specifically, improved
performance of JSI when inquiring over multiple jobs, rolling up project financials to level of detail as
high as 5.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Reduce time for project managers and financial managers to review and analyze the financial
state of a series of projects as a group.
Examples: Inquire on about 41 jobs that have between 1000-3000 accounts per job, rolling up to a
Level of Detail 5.

Internal performance measurements went from minutes to seconds to summarize and display the same
project information. Individual performance improvements may vary.

Revenue Recognition [510 : 11-May-2023]


The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) created a joint standard regarding the recognition of revenue. This standard will be effective for
the first quarterly report in the first annual period beginning after December 15, 2017 ( for public
companies) and after December 15, 2018 (for non-public companies). Organizations may choose to
adopt the new standard one year earlier that these dates.

This feature adds new enhancements to the Project Costing module that enables users to abide by the
new five step process for revenue recognition:

1. Identify the contract with the customer.


2. Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract.
3. Determine the transaction price.
4. Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations,
5. Recognize revenue as separate performance obligations are satisfied.

This new FASB/IASB standard affects all products that recognize revenue including Accounts
Receivable, Sales Order Management, Advanced Contract Billing, Contract and Service Billing, and
Project Costing.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature enables users to be compliant with the new standard for recognition of revenue
that was published by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International
Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

Revenue Recognition By Subledger [520 : 11-May-2023]


The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) created a joint standard regarding the recognition of revenue. This standard will be effective for
the first quarterly report in the first annual period beginning after December 15, 2017 ( for public
companies) and after December 15, 2018 (for non-public companies). Organizations may choose to
adopt the new standard one year earlier that these dates.

This feature gives customers the ability to recognize revenue by subledger when running the Profit
Recognition batch program in the Project Costing module.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 7 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Owner Address Search in Job Master [530 : 22-Jun-2021]


Within the Job Master (P51006), you can now search for the job owner address number.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)


Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Adding this field to the QBE allows users to quickly access jobs based on how a company
runs its business which is owner-centric. This new functionality eliminates the need to write down the
jobs related an owner.

Add Category Codes 24 to 43 in Job Cost Original Budget Entry [540 : 23-Jun-2021]
Within the Job Cost Original Budget Entry application (P510121), you can now search by account
category codes 24 through 43.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)


Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Adding these fields to the QBE allows users to quickly access budgets for a job based on
how a company runs its business. Category codes 24 through 43 have been available through the
Account Master (P0901) and are now accessible within the Job Cost Original Budget Entry application.
This new functionality eliminates the need to write down the accounts for a job that have specific
category code values.

Preconfigured Notifications for Job Cost [550 : 23-Jun-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Job Cost. Your users can subscribe to
these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for your unique
use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Project Status Inquiry [560 : 02-Nov-2021]


You can use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Job Cost system to effectively manage projects by using
the new Project Status Inquiry program. The Project Status Inquiry program enables you to:
- Define columns for the ledger and billing amounts that you want to view.
- Group the column definitions into easy-to-use column layouts.
- Customize and display indicators to alert you to amounts that exceed the thresholds that you specify.
- View job, project, and billing data in detail or graph configurations on the Project Advisor Console form.
- View detailed job and billing data across multiple jobs, projects, and companies.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 8 of 202
- Specify the data to include in a chart in the Project Advisor Console form.
- Save the view of the job and billing records that you selected along with the values that the system
calculated for the records.
Additionally, the Project Status Inquiry program will include the standard level of detail financial roll-up
capabilities.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Preconfigured Notifications for Change Management [570 : 18-Dec-2020]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Change Management. Your users can
subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for
your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Project Management [590 : 10-Dec-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design
philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that provides the information you need to know at a glance with
alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway directly into the applications you need to use, when you
need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solution
for Project Management:
- Project Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 9 of 202
Ability to Copy a Job to Multiple Jobs [600 : 09-May-2023]
Project accountants can quickly and easily copy a job's cost code/ cost type and budget to multiple jobs
across the organization. This change significantly reduces the time spent in creating accounts and
budgets for an organization's jobs and projects.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Engineering and Construction
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Advanced Job Forecasting

Advanced Job Forecasting System [540 : 02-Nov-2021]


Customers who work on projects with low margins need the ability to assess the forecasted cost and
revenue to a very detailed level. Project managers also need additional methods to calculate the
forecasted amounts for each project. With Advanced Job Forecasting, project managers have a more
accurate overall projected project financial status with more detailed and auditable visibility into the
remaining work on a project.

The Advanced Job Forecasting programs enable users to:


1.Create unit-based forecasts based on unit cost, units completed, adjusted unit price, or units
remaining.
2.Create lump sum forecast with override data that comes from field workers. For example, a change in
unit price, change in subcontractor cost, or additional committed costs to occur that are not yet recorded.

3.View additional time and material forecasts.


4.View additional revenue forecasts.
5.Create notes at the header and line level within the forecast.
6.Lock the detailed forecast and save history.
7.Select user-defined methods of computation based on user-defined formulas.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Engineering and Construction
Benefits: The Advanced Job Forecasting programs enable users to:
1.Create unit-based forecasts based on unit cost, units completed, adjusted unit price, or units
remaining.
2.Create lump sum forecast with override data that comes from field workers. For example, a change in
unit price, change in subcontractor cost, or additional committed costs to occur that are not yet recorded.

3.View additional time and material forecasts.


4.View additional revenue forecasts.
5.Create notes at the header and line level within the forecast.
6.Lock the detailed forecast and save history.
7.Select user-defined methods of computation based on user-defined formulas.
Examples: A project manager wants to update the forecast for the foundation work of a building based
on information he has learned at the job site.

The project manager knows that in order to complete the foundation work, another 100 cubic yards of
concrete (at a given cost per cubic yard) are needed, 200 additional man-hours (at a specific cost per
hour) are needed to install the concrete, plus 8 additional hours (at a specific cost per hour) are needed
for cleanup in order to complete this task.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 10 of 202
After identifying the remaining work and associated unit costs, the project manager saves this detailed
forecast and indicates that he is ready to update the estimate to complete. The estimate to complete for
this cost code is updated with the additional forecast and the saved detail remains for future reference.
User Experience: The Advanced Job Forecasting programs enable users to:
1.Create unit-based forecasts based on unit cost, units completed, adjusted unit price, or units
remaining.
2.Create lump sum forecast with override data that comes from field workers. For example, a change in
unit price, change in subcontractor cost, or additional committed costs to occur that are not yet recorded.

3.View additional time and material forecasts.


4.View additional revenue forecasts.
5.Create notes at the header and line level within the forecast.
6.Lock the detailed forecast and save history.
7.Select user-defined methods of computation based on user-defined formulas.

Copying an Existing Job Forecast to a New Job Forecast [560 : 20-Oct-2020]


The Work with Job Forecast Details form (P51F100) has been updated with a Copy button enabling
users to copy an existing forecast to a new forecast with the same job. Additionally, the Copy
Attachments and Remarks from prior forecast processing option has been updated to enable users to
copy the media attachments and the remarks from approved forecasts while adding an existing forecast
to a new forecast.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Homebuilder Management

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Homebuilder Management [120 : 02-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Homebuilder Management:
- Lot Start Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 11 of 202
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Community Revisions Simplified User Experience [130 : 23-Jun-2021]


The Community Revisions form has been simplified by including the associated descriptions for
Community Address, Construction Office Address, and Sales Office Address. The revised form makes it
easier for builders to understand these attributes clearly.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Ability to Specify Cancellation Date When Canceling Commitments [140 : 23-Jun-2021]


When canceling an Extra Purchase Order (EPO) commitment from Lot Start Workfile program, the
cancellation date can now be specified. This change provides the project accountant much needed
flexibility to supply the specific Cancel Date instead of the system date, which is critical for reflecting the
canceled commitment in the proper accounting period.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Eliminate Customization with Improved Supplier Determination Process for Takeoff Contracts
[150 : 02-Nov-2021]
The Supplier To-Be-Determined process for takeoff contracts is improved to closely mimic the Supplier
To-Be-Determined process for bid contracts. Underlying functionality changes have been made, such
that the assignment process of selecting the eligible supplier on the fly is simplified for takeoff contracts.
This change eliminates customization, which is otherwise needed for manually restricting the
assignment of non-eligible suppliers to the takeoff contract.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Improved Framework for Closing Entries of a House Sale at the Community Level [160 : 23-Jun-
2021]
The framework of completing the closing entries by mapping unit type ledgers with the criteria for
deriving the closing data of a house sale at the community level is improved in the corresponding
Closing Worksheet Accounting Instructions and Data Mapping applications. This improvement involves
multi-faceted changes that boost the accuracy of the lot allocation process involving indirect or land
costs, refines pro forma forecasting to determine the true profit for a community, and aids in drawing up
the project projections based on the actual or estimated cost per square footage. These changes also
help to generate the budget for a statistical account maintained for the plan's square footage data.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Home Construction

Ability to Use a Combination of Wildcard Character and Specific Values in Option Cost Detail
Form [170 : 11-Apr-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 12 of 202
The enhanced Option Master Maintenance program (P44H401) enables you to use a combination of
wildcard and specific values for takeoff records in the Option Cost Detail form. This facilitates accurate
pricing for current options along with the current cost information.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: Home Construction
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 13 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Supply Chain Execution (Logistics)


Demand Scheduling Execution

Demand Scheduling Execution Usability Improvements [170 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne continues with its focus on improving the user experience. The focus for
this set of enhancements is:
- Enhance targeted applications to adhere to a consistent user interface standard
- Enhance targeted applications to address specific usability improvement opportunities
- Improved error reporting within the R40R10 Workflow messaging and PDF output
- A new row exit to the Sales Order Entry Application exists within the DSE - Work with Demand Detail.
This row exit will enable the user to quickly navigate to the populated Sales Order created from DSE.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: - Consistent user experience across aplications in EnterpriseOne
- Improved efficiency
- Improved user experience

Bulk Stock Inventory

Assign Lots and Country Of Origin to Bulk Stock Items [20 : 09-Apr-2015]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Bulk Stock Management solution supports:.
- Assigning lot numbers to bulk items.
- Assigning Country of Origin (CoO) to a lot for stocking type B (bulk)
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution

ASTM Standard Adoption Updated [30 : 11-May-2023]


The new ASTM standard published by the American Petroleum Institute: The temperature range has
been increased to support temperature ranging from -50 degrees centigrade to 150 degrees of
centigrade.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: Latest ASTM Standards.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 14 of 202
Inventory Management

Inventory to General Ledger Reconciliation [130 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides the ability to automatically and manually reconcile G/L
transactions; however it only provides an integrity report to show differences between the Item Ledger
and the G/L. This enhancement reconciles Item Ledger records to their corresponding G/L records.

With this enhancement reconciliation is done via a batch process which will reconcile all transactions
without a variance. It will also provide a workbench to review reconciled and un-reconciled transactions.
A manual reconciliation can be done through the workbench. Adjustment journal entries can be
selected to be reconciled with transactions with a variance.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Improve Item Ledger to G/L Reconciliation

Simplify Reconciliation Process


- Schedule the batch process to run automatically at regular intervals
- Manually process exceptions at your convenience
- No more paper reports needed – utilize an interactive process

Improve Productivity
- No need to wait for a batch job to run to find any variances
- Interactive workbench works with real time data
- Personalize the application to view the information important to you

Increase Visibility
- View your variances interactively at any time
- View reconciled transactions at any time
- Item Ledger and Account Ledger transactions are updated as reconciled so they never have to be
looked at again

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Inventory Management [270 : 14-Nov-2016]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Inventory Management:
- Inventory Accounting Manager
- Inventory Control Manager

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 15 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Managing Secondary Location Deletions Using User Defined Codes [280 : 05-Oct-2018]
The Item Balance Purge process has been enhanced to allow users to delete secondary locations when
the work order, sales order, or purchase order statuses are defined as closed in User Defined Code
tables 41/WC, 41/SP, and 41/PP respectively.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Set Default Display Options for Work with Item Availability form [290 : 26-Jan-2022]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Inventory Management system has been enhanced with processing
options to specify the default display options on the Work with Item Availability form. This change
enables users to specify whether the 'Summary Only' and 'Omit Zero Quantities' check boxes are
selected on the Work with Item Availability form.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Support for Non-Blank Approved Lot Statuses [300 : 02-Jun-2021]


System administrators can now set up approved lot statuses with values and enable all applications that
validate lot status to recognize these statuses as approved. A batch program has also been delivered to
update existing lot statuses to support adoption of this feature. Prior to this enhancement, only a lot
status without any value (blank) was considered as approved.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing

Allow Inventory Locations to be Put on Hold [310 : 06-Dec-2023]


Inventory management and control is made much more efficient and flexible by allowing availability and
movement to be determined by a Location Hold field in the Location Master that determines what kind of
transactions are allowed and takes precedence over the Lot Status in the Item Location table. This
eliminates the need to update individual item/lot/location records.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 16 of 202
On Hand Inventory Repost [320 : 08-Feb-2023]
A new application has been created to recalculate and update the Item Location Quantity On Hand field
from the sum of transaction quantities in the Item Ledger records. This eliminates the need for manual
procedures or custom programs required to reconcile quantity discrepancies between Item Ledger and
Item Balance tables.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Work Order Component Requested Date Option [330 : 20-Apr-2023]


Component requested dates can now be based on either the work order start date or the start date of
the operation utilizing the component when attaching a work order parts list. Prior to this enhancement,
requested dates were always based on the start date of the work order, which is not ideal for
manufactured items with long production cycles.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Transportation Management

Transportation Management Usability [120 : 11-May-2023]


Transportation usability improvements are being deployed to improve the overall effectiveness and
processing of the Transportation Management Solution:
1. The Transportation Cross Reference application(P49T01) has been rewritten to support two form and
to process similar to other setup applications.
2. Transportation Shipment Confirmation (P49645) glossary text processing options have been
improved to provide the user guidance on how the application will behave.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: - Consistent user experience across applications in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne which
improves efficiency and the user experience
- Enhance targeted applications to adhere to a consistent user interface standard
- Enhance targeted applications to address specific usability improvement opportunities
- Improved processing options and glossaries
- Improve data integrity
- Improved user/administrator productivity with the elimination of manual efforts to recovery from event
(s) that interrupt standard processing

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Transportation Management [310 : 23-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 17 of 202
These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Warehouse Management:
- Transportation Manager
- Shipping Supervisor
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Batch Load Confirmation Supported in R49500 [320 : 23-Nov-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Transportation Management application now provides customers the
ability to confirm loads automatically using Batch Shipment Confirmation. This improves order fulfillment
efficiency for customers with high volumes of loads containing a high volume of shipments who
previously had to perform this task manually.
This new option is available for non-compartmentalized loads that are either standard or in-transit. When
confirming loads in batch, shipments are processed in sequence by load number, planning depot, load
leg number, shipment number, and routing step number. If you do not use the new option to confirm
loads, shipments are processed in sequence by shipment number and routing step number.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of June 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: Instead of manually confirming loads, you can use a batch process to confirm non-
compartmentalized standard and in-transit loads. The batch process enables you to process more
records in a shorter amount of time, leading to increased efficiency.

Preconfigured Notifications for Transportation Management [330 : 26-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Transportation Management. Your
users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize
them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific
business needs.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 18 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Freight Update (R4981) Error Processing [340 : 18-Jun-2021]


The Freight Update program (R4981) has been modified to continue processing even though errors may
occur while processing a shipment or load. Any errors that occur will appear in the Work Center.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of May 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: The system processes all shipments and loads and does not stop processing when it
encounters the first error. Instead, the system processes the job and lists the errors in the Work Center.
The ability to process all the shipments and loads without interruption when errors occur ensures
efficient use of time. Users can then go to the Work Center to view and address all the errors that
occurred during processing.

Transportation Distance and Mileage Web Services Plug-in [350 : 23-Nov-2021]


The JD Edwards Transportation Management system provides a generic plug-in that enables customers
to consume mileage or distance web services that are offered by vendors in the logistics industry. This
generic plug-in enables customers to retrieve distances from an origin postal code to a destination
postal code that are used to determine transportation rates in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system.
Additionally, customers can retrieve distances based on geocodes of the origin and destination to
determine rates. We leverage Orchestrator Studio, which is part of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne tools
set, to provide a modern solution that gives customers the choice of vendors such as PC Miler, Google
Maps, and so on. This functionality eliminates the need for customers to perform customizations to
support their transportation needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Freight Update Report to Include Weight, Volume, and Unit of Measure [370 : 09-May-2023]
The Freight Update report (R4981) of Transportation Management has been enhanced to include the
weight, volume, and unit of measure in the report output. This information will enable the accounts
payable personnel to easily and quickly verify that the weight, volume, and unit of measure on the
invoice of the transportation carrier match those for the load or shipment. This will improve productivity
due to simplified verification process.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Enable Attachments for the License Revisions Form [380 : 09-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Transportation Management system now provides the option to add
attachments on the License Revisions form of the License Maintenance program (P49020), enabling
users to add attachments with key information and retain its history. This capability enables customers
to communicate additional information related to the licensed equipment (such as trailers, tractors,
trucks, and so on) and eliminates the need for this information to be stored in external documents.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 19 of 202
Order Information Available for Payable Records in Freight Audit History [390 : 09-May-2023]
The Freight Audit History table is updated to include the Order Number, Order Type, and Order Key
Company to enable users to access payable freight records. Users can now retrieve information from
freight order history with the order number. This enhances user experience, improves efficiency and
productivity.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Capture and Pass Global Location Number of Origin Branch Plant in Advanced Shipping Notice
[400 : 09-May-2023]
Transportation Management is enhanced to capture the Global Location Number (GLN) of the Origin or
shipping branch plant and is made available in Advanced Shipping Notice (ASN) (R47032). It refines the
business process for the customers and helps to improve productivity by eliminating unnecessary
communication for GLN between two entities sharing ASN.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Improved Transportation extraction XML supports Oracle Transportation Management [410 : 09-
May-2023]
The transportation management system now generates XML files from Corporation Extraction (R49T70)
and Location Extraction (R49T80) reports even without a parent entity in the Address Book. This
capability enables users to seamlessly connect and share JD Edwards EnterpriseOne reports to Oracle
Transport Management (OTM).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Uplift JDE Transportation Reports to Support Updated OTM XML Validation Schema [420 : 13-
Jan-2023]
Oracle Transportation Management (OTM) Cloud has been upgraded to a strict schema validation of the
XML files received from JD Edwards and other external systems as part of the corporate security
requirements. To comply with this requirement, the XML reports generated in JD Edwards that support
the integration to OTM have been uplifted to support the updated OTM XML schema validation that is
mandatory as of Oracle Cloud Release 23A. This uplift ensures continuous seamless integration
between OTM and JD Edwards Transportation Management.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Ability to Specify G/L Dates for Freight Audit History Application [430 : 13-Jan-2023]
Customers frequently receive freight invoices several weeks after having run Freight Update, sometimes
in a new fiscal month or year. When using the Freight Audit History application to adjust freight charges,
the application creates a new G/L batch with the default G/L date of the original shipment date. By

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 20 of 202
accepting the original shipment date, the adjustment batch could end up posting in a prior fiscal period
which is not the desired outcome. Although you are able to change the date when doing the transaction,
it can easily be missed and forgotten. If you don't blank out the G/L date field to allow the current date to
default, then the entry might be mistakenly booked to a prior period.

To address this issue, The Freight Audit History application has been enhanced so that you can specify
which date the system uses as the default G/L date when making freight adjustments to shipments. You
can specify whether the system uses the original shipment date, current system date, or blank so that
you can manually enter the G/L date if desired.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: This enhancement provides flexibility to use the G/L date option that fits your business
process best to ensure that transactions are posted to the correct fiscal period.
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Automatically Calculate Tax and Net Amount for Freight Adjustments [440 : 13-Jan-2023]
Customers encounter situations where transportation carriers must provide additional services or special
equipment to deliver a shipment. Examples of these services include inside delivery, liftgate service, and
notification prior to delivery. Accessorial charges are the costs associated with providing these types of
services. Often the shipper and carrier are not aware of such services that may be required at the time
of delivery. The accessorial charges are not accounted for at the time of freight update. Thus, an
adjustment must be made during the voucher match process to account for accessorial charges.

The Freight Audit History application has been enhanced to default in tax codes and automatically
calculate the tax and net amount of freight charge adjustments added during the voucher match
process. This enhancement improves productivity and the overall user experience.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Display Billable Freight Line after all Order Lines for each Shipment on the Sales Order [450 : 11-
Apr-2023]
The Freight Update Batch application is enhanced to insert billable freight on a new line at the end of
each shipment's order lines on the sales order. This enhancement improves the overall user experience
by displaying information in a logical coherent manner on the sales order.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Option to Bypass Assigning Shipment Numbers to Non-Stock Lines [460 : 11-Apr-2023]


JD Edwards Transportation Management has been enhanced with a processing option to prevent the
system from assigning shipment numbers to non-stock order lines during transportation shipment
confirmation.
This enhancement provides you the flexibility and choice to process non-stock order lines with or without
shipment numbers. Consequently, it eliminates the need for inefficient workarounds and customizations

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 21 of 202
to reconcile non-stock order lines that should not be assigned a shipment number.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Usability Enhancements for Transportation Management [470 : 09-Jun-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne continues to deliver customer driven enhancements to support
Transportation Management. The current updates are aimed at improving the overall user experience
and enriching functionality. New functional capabilities include the options to validate actual shipment
date at transportation ship confirm, segregate partial shipment into new lines, purge loads to improve
performance when processing load, and expand the Dimensional Weight Factor field to support metric
dimensions when rating shipments. The user experience is improved by simplifying how media objects
work for the Work with Shipments program.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2023

Enterprise Automation for Logistics [490 : 06-Dec-2023]


Enterprise Automation for Logistics help customers to improve enterprise-wide operations through
integrated automation and generated data. The objectives are to:
- Expand the focus from individual transactions to the business as a whole.
- Make better use of existing data to reveal blind spots in a process.
- Define processes and data needed for better visibility and corrective action.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Warehouse Management

Warehouse License Plate Usability [100 : 11-May-2023]


Usability enhancements were deployed in the following Warehouse Application:
- P46L010 - License Plate Segmentation
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Planned Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: The enhanced applications provide a more uniform and consistent look and feel across the
Supply Chain (Logistics)applications.
Examples:

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Warehouse Management [170 : 23-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 22 of 202
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Warehouse Management:
- Warehouse Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

License Plate Attachments [180 : 18-Jun-2021]


The License Plate Workbench (P46L10), License Plate Cross-Reference (P46L20), and License Plate
History (P46L99) programs have been modified to enable users to add attachments.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: The ability to add attachments to the License Plate programs enables users to update license
plates with key information and retain its history. This capability eliminates the need to store this
information in external documents.

Exclude Inbound Quantities to Calculate Item Availability for Warehouse Management Move
Requests [190 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Location Selection Driver program (R46171) and the Manual Planner program (P4600) in the
Warehouse Management System now provide a processing option that enables you to exclude inbound
quantities from the item availability calculation and create suggestions only for locations that have on-
hand quantities.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: • Increased productivity and warehouse utilization
• Increased labor efficiency as pickers will only make productive trips to the warehouse
• The system creates suggestions for locations with on-hand quantities only

License Plate Print Batch [200 : 18-Jun-2021]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 23 of 202
The Warehouse Management System has been enhanced to include the new License Plate Print Batch
(R46L850) program. This program includes processing options that allow you to print the report as a
PDF document out of the box or to specify a version of a customized report that enables you to create
an XML label output that contains user-defined license plate information. Additionally, the License Plate
Workbench (P46L10) program has been enhanced to enable you to launch the License Plate Print
Batch (R46L850) program.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Automatically Launch Tiebreaker Program from Build Random Location Table Program [230 : 09-
May-2023]
The Warehouse Management system is enhanced to automatically run the Build Tiebreaker Files
program for random storage locations from the Build Random Location Table Program. Using a new
processing option, warehouse operators or managers can automate the two-step manual process of
setting up random rules for linking random location profiles to a characteristics group. This helps to
simplify the process and eliminate any chances of manual error.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This automation saves execution and tracking time, eliminates the possibility of overlooking
the step, reduces dependency, and improves efficiency and productivity.

Location Capacity Workbench Enhanced to Include Rollup Functionality [240 : 09-May-2023]


The Warehouse Management system is enhanced to include rollup functionality in the Location Capacity
Workbench program (P46L40). This functionality provides data visibility and uses Level of Detail (LOD)
for locations to ensure better utilization and capacity planning of branch/plants assigned with License
Plate Numbers (LPNs).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Users can:
•View capacity information rolled up based on Level of Detail (LOD) for LPN branch plant
•View utilization of LPN zones in an LPN environment
•Plan capacity of zones in an LPN environment

Expanded License Plate Number Commitment Swap Flexibility [280 : 09-May-2023]


JD Edwards Warehouse Management has been enhanced to enable companies using license plate
functionality to increase picking efficiency with the ability to allow commitment swap within a specified
date range. Additionally, warehouse operators can configure the system to allow commitment swap
between locations. With this enhancement, customers have increased flexibility to perform license plate
commitment swap.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Warehouse Management Support for Inventory Costing by Lot/Location [290 : 09-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 24 of 202
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Warehouse Management system now supports item costing by
Lot/Location. Users can now capture the costs of an item at any desired level, Item, Branch/Plant, or
Lot/Location level throughout the JD Edwards system. The ability to maintain consistent costing
eliminates incorrect license plate commitments and release of inventory, removes the need for manual
validation and editing of costs, and results in improved process efficiency.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Warehouse License Plate Picking Optimization [50 : 20-Oct-2020]


Provide warehouse license plate customers additional features that will enable them to efficiently fulfill
demand. The feature includes:
- Ability to manually and automatically identify a license plate as a partial or full plate
- Enhanced picking logic to govern breakdown of license plates
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: - Optimized license plate picking
- Maximize location utilization
- Maximize overall warehouse productivity

Warehouse License Plate Putaway Match [60 : 11-May-2023]


Provide an option for warehouse license plate customers to select a putaway process for license plates
that groups' different lots of the same item into a location based on matching lot dates.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: The grouping of lots into locations based on matching dates will benefit customers to optimize
move instructions and allows for quicker and efficient allocation of inventory during fulfillment (pick)
process

Warehouse License Plate Commitment Swap [70 : 11-May-2023]


Enable warehouse license plate customers to swap commitments for license plates that are already
committed in the pick confirmation application.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: Provide warehouse personel the ability to pick from the location nearest to them in the
warehouse.

Warehouse Management Tablet [80 : 11-May-2023]


A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Warehouse Management Tablet will provide users visibility of available
items within locations of their warehouse. The user will be able to track the locations and availability of
an item at various warehouse unit of measure (UoM) levels.

In addition the user can identify characteristics of a license plate and browse through license plate

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 25 of 202
hierarchy.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: Users no longer need to be tied to their desktop and can roam the warehouse floor to access
item availability via a mobile device.

Warehouse Management Usability Enhancements [90 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne continues improving the user experience with these enhancements:

- The Warehouse Move Slips(R46472) and the Move Tag(R46473) are now utilizing the Ship To
Contact ID Functionality.
- Warehouse Confirmations (P4617) has been updated to make Shipment Number (SHPN) available
and searchable.
- Warehouse Confirmations (P4617) has also been enhanced to allow the user to the override locations
for selected or all orders in the warehouse.
- Item standard packs (P460131) has been enhanced to issue an error if the user tries to enter a record
with the Outer Carton equal to the Inner Carton and Inner Carton equal to the Outer Carton of an
existing record, for the same Branch, Sold To and/or Ship To.
- Location Selection Driver Program (R46171)processing options have enhanced to remove all DREAM
WRITER references.
- Online Putaway Reservations Detail (P46130) now supports new Cancel functionality.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: - Consistent user experience across applications in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
improves efficiency and the user experience

Outbound Inventory Management

Outbound Inventory Management [10 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system enables improved cohesion
between suppliers and their customers by providing:
•Improved management and tracking of outbound inventory agreements.
•Fewer stock-outs and increased visibility into inventory movement.
•Improved forecasting to trigger replenishment for effective demand planning.
•Automated, efficient and effective response to outbound inventory consumption reporting.
•Improved inventory management using acknowledgement for inventory received at customer's
location.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: Benefits for Suppliers
•Increased sales
•Reduced warehouse space resulting in reduced inventory holding costs
•Reduced lead times to fill outbound inventory orders
•Increased visibility into inventory movement
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 26 of 202
•Secured business with the customer protecting their interests against competitors

Benefits for Customers


•Financial resources remain free until agreement terms are met or inventory is consumed
•Reduced operating costs and capital expenses
•Reduced risk of stock-outs

Quantity On-Hand Field Made Visible on the Item Availability by Location Form [100 : 11-May-
2023]
The Work with Item Availability by Location form has been enhanced to display the On-Hand Quantity
field. With this field visible customers can see if there is stock on hand. This enhancement eliminates
the need to create a customized form.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Platforms Industry:

Invoice by Sold To Instead of Ship To [110 : 23-Jun-2021]


The Outbound Inventory Generate Billing process has been enhanced so that you can generate a billing
order for what is sold to a customer by the end of month. This flexibility will enable you to have one
invoice for the sales made to a customer for the whole month. Previously, one invoice was generated for
each shipment and therefore most of the times, multiple invoices were generated for a month. This
enhancement improves the efficiency of the billing process and reduces the maintenance.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Outbound Inventory Agreements [20 : 11-May-2023]


With the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system, you can establish
consigned or vendor managed inventory agreements with your customers.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system allows you to establish
agreements with your customers with respect to effective date, agreement location, items, stocking
levels, replenishment methods and so on.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management systems supports the following kinds
of agreements:
1)Consigned Inventory agreements
2)VMI Internally Owned agreements
3)VMI Customer Owned agreements
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: You can record all transactions, monitor quantity or amount balances, and determine whether
you and customer are in compliance with the agreement terms.

Sales Orders for Consigned Inventory [30 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system allows you to create and
process sales orders for consigned inventory. You can:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 27 of 202
1.Resolve Consigned agreements during sales order entry.
2.Choose from a list of agreements to resolve, for a sales order using the new Outbound Inventory
Agreement Selection application.
3.Ship confirm the consigned shipment orders and create item ledger records.
4.Acknowledge the receipt of inventory at your customer's location.
5.Run Sales Update report to create general ledger and item ledger records for the consigned shipment
orders.
6. Track inventory shipped to customer's location.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution

Outbound Inventory Consumption Reporting [40 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management system allows you to manage
inventory at your customer's location. You can use the new consumption reporting application to
effectively report consumption at your customer's location and subsequently create replenishment and
billing orders.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: With the new Report Outbound Inventory Consumption application, you can:
1.Report consumption at customer's location.
2. Report consumption with respect to lot and location of the items.
3.Report consumption using First In First Out (FIFO) method.
4.See replenishment suggestions during consumption reporting.
5.Automatically create replenishment orders during consumption reporting.
6. Create billing orders for already consumed inventory.

EDI for Outbound Inventory Consumption Reporting [50 : 11-May-2023]


Customers can use Outbound Consumption EDI to send their consigned or vendor managed inventory
consumption details and suppliers can receive the EDI data in to the system without manual
intervention.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: EDIs are the heart of any big business. EDIs are used to transact information between
business partners. Consumption reporting is an important business process in Outbound Inventory
Management. Once the consigned or vendor managed inventory is consumed, the customer usually
sends a consumption advise to the supplier in a collaborative VMI model. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
provides EDI capability for outbound inventory consumption. The existing ASCI 852 and EDIFACT
INVRPT have been enhanced to support outbound inventory consumption. EDI 852 or INVPRT are the
standard data format for providing trading partners with product SKU activity data, such as inventory
levels, sales rates and other product movement-related information.

Outbound Inventory Item Groups [60 : 11-May-2023]


It is a general business practice to create contracts/agreements for group of items rather than individual
items. Outbound Inventory Management supports item groups for customers to create and process
agreements for group of items with similar characteristics.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 28 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: Creating agreements for item groups reduces the effort and resources required to manage
multiple agreements for items with similar characteristics.

Outbound Inventory Return [70 : 11-May-2023]


Outbound Inventory Return enables customers to return damaged, unused or expired inventory back to
the customer's location by automating it through RMA.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: Outbound Inventory Management provides an automated business process to return
consigned or vendor managed inventory.

Outbound Inventory Auditing [80 : 11-May-2023]


Outbound consumption audit ensures that the inventory consumption reported by the customer is
accurate. It enables the user to take corrective action based on the counted quantity.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: •Auditing enables the customers to keep accurate inventory at customer's location.
•It reduces the monetary amounts that are invested in inventory and the downtime that is attributed to
stock outages.
•Auditing provides the ability to print actual quantity information from the system and take corrective
action during inventory discrepancies

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Outbound Inventory Management [90 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Outbound Inventory Management:
- VMI Agreement Manager
- VMI Account Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 29 of 202
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Apparel Management

New Shipment Number Created for Non-Validated Lines during Allocations [120 : 11-May-2023]
The Oracle JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Apparel/Attribute Management system provides an efficient way
to distribute the available multi-attribute items among the open sales orders via the allocation process.

During the allocation process, any sales order lines which satisfy the allocation rules will be hard
committed and assigned a shipment number. Any other sales orders which do not satisfy the allocation
rules will be soft committed and receive a new shipment number.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: Customers can ship their available multi-attribute items on time and accurately while still
maintaining back order multi-attribute items on a new shipment.
Examples: Size distribution allocation rule ensure that sizes in high demand (like size large (L) or
medium (M)) will be shipped more compared to sizes having less demand or lower selling point (i.e.,
XXL, XXXL, XXS)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 30 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Supply Management (Procurement)


Procurement and Subcontracts Management

Procurement Usability Enhancements [410 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne continues with it's focus on improving the user experience:

1. Transaction Processing and Record Reservation within the Purchase Order Receipt Inquiry
Application (P43214).

2. Record Reservation within the Routing Ledger Inquiry Inquiry Application (P43252)
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - Improve data integrity
- Improved user/administrator productivity with the elimination of manual efforts to recovery from event
(s) that interrupt standard processing

Procurement and Requisition Self Service Budget Level of Detail (LOD) Rollup [420 : 12-Nov-
2021]
Procurement budget checking accurately tracks encumbrance and budgets within the level of detail of a
business unit for Procurement and Requisition Self Service.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Real-Time Summarization: Purchase Orders [550 : 18-Apr-2015]


In the Purchase Orders program, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review aggregated
totals, instead of scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Increase purchasing performance with real-time summarization of supplier account balances.

Gain visibility into total spending by suppliers across companies by viewing foreign or domestic amounts
by supplier, branch/plant, and base currency.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 31 of 202
UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Procurement [560 : 12-Nov-2021]
JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Procurement:
- Procurement Manager
- Strategic Buyer
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Orchestrations for Procure-to-Pay Process [570 : 12-Nov-2021]


The procure-to-pay business process, from the issuance of the purchase order to the creation of an
Accounts Payable voucher, is a time-consuming and costly process. Not only does the process involve
many manual steps, but the buyer and supplier often work disconnected from each other. To simplify
this process, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered sample orchestrations and a notification that you
can leverage to facilitate several inbound and outbound transactions and automate many of the steps in
the procure-to-pay process. You can use the notification to notify you of purchase orders awaiting
approval, and the orchestrations to update the purchase order status, retrieve purchase order details,
and add supplier invoice lines to aid voucher creation.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Preconfigured Notifications for Procurement Management [580 : 12-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 32 of 202
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Procurement Management. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Voucher Match Manager Web Service [590 : 12-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides the ability to override the tax explanation code and tax rate for
purchase order detail lines, during voucher match, when using the Voucher Match Manager Web
Service. This way, the accounts payable system can account for any change in the tax rate from the
time the purchase order was created to the time it is vouchered. The taxes can also accrue at a line
level at the time of voucher match. By providing this capability, the Voucher Match Manager Web
Service works similar to the standard voucher program P4314.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Soft Rounding of Taxes in Voucher Match Based on Tax Rate and Tax Area [610 : 12-Nov-2021]
This feature addresses rounding errors when posting Accounts Payable batches. When multiple tax
rates are applied to a single Tax Area, the current tax rounding functionality ignores the different tax
rates and this often leads to tax amount differences, causing the Voucher Post program to fail. To solve
this problem, soft rounding for taxes is performed taking into account both the Tax Area and Tax Rate.
This requirement has arisen from the proposed taxation changes in Japan from October 2019. The new
regulatory change mandates multiple consumption tax rates for different groups of items. This feature
will mitigate the rounding errors by calculating rounded tax amounts using both the Tax Area and Tax
Rate. Additionally, the feature will provide the user the ability to choose whether rounded tax amounts
should be calculated using only the Tax Area or both the Tax Area and Tax Rate.
Note: Also available for release 9.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Tax on Landed Cost [620 : 22-Jun-2022]


Landed costs are trade costs such as insurance, freight costs, storage costs, container fees, and import
or export charges. Knowledge of and visibility into these trade costs help the purchasing organizations to
evaluate new product plans and price their items with ease, and also negotiate contracts with their
suppliers. With the Landed Costs feature, Accounts Payable personnel will be able to apply tax on
landed costs during the voucher match process and thereby have a clear understanding of the true cost
associated with the purchase of goods.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Accounts Payable personnel will now have improved visibility into the costs of goods
associated with landed costs. With the ability to apply tax on landed costs during the voucher match
process, Accounts Payable personnel will be able to see the true expenditures per product and in turn,
can determine ways to reduce the expenditure. This functionality also helps the purchasing
organizations to make more informed decisions when sourcing a product, thereby improving the profit
margins.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 33 of 202
Cost Object and Cost Object Type Added to RTPOOUT and RTPOOUT2 [630 : 12-Nov-2021]
The XML document that is generated for real-time events RTPOOUT and RTPOOUT2, now includes
cost object and cost object type fields. These fields additionally help in sending the cost object-related
information to the third-party systems.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Ability to Track Actual Cost Separate from Procurement Price Adjustments [640 : 23-Jun-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system includes a DMAAI, 4371, to create separate G/L journal entries
for procurement price adjustments. The inclusion of the new DMAAI enables customers to track the
actual cost and adjustment amount separately in the General Ledger table (F0911).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This functionality enables the JD Edwards customers to track the actual cost and the
procurement adjustment amount under separate accounts in the F0911 table.

Purchase Order Approvals Program (P43081) Version Not Hardcoded in Approval Mail [650 : 22-
Jun-2022]
As a procurement personnel, you can specify the version of the Purchase Order Approvals program
(P43081) that is called from the link provided in the approval mail. The approvers can launch the right
version of the application from the mail to approve orders, that is, use the right order type based on
business needs and complete the approval process.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Receipt by Item: Supplier Display Based on Item [660 : 12-Nov-2021]


The PO Receipts program (P4312) has been enhanced to display the appropriate supplier number on
the Purchase Order Receipts form (W4312A) based on the item that a user selects for receipt on the
Purchase Orders to Receive form (W4312F). Prior to this enhancement, the system always displayed
the supplier number associated with the first record in the Purchase Orders to Receive form even if the
selected item did not belong to that supplier. Therefore, this enhancement improves the accuracy of
supplier information displayed in the PO Receipts program (P4312).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

VMA: Summarization of Pay Items for Single Voucher Per Invoice [670 : 22-Jun-2022]
The Voucher Match Automation (VMA) reports R4304016, R4304020, and R4304021 have been
enhanced to display voucher pay items summarized by invoice for non-logged vouchers. This behavior
holds good when the Single Voucher Per Invoice processing option is set to 1 in the Voucher Match
Automation Driver program (R4304010). This enhancement improves the accuracy of information
displayed on the VMA reports, as it makes the information consistent with the information in the
Accounts Payable Ledger table (F0411).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 34 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Error Check for Logged Voucher [680 : 11-Dec-2020]


During redistribution of a logged voucher through the Voucher Match Program (P4314), the system
displays an error message when the G/L date of the voucher is earlier than the G/L date of the logged
voucher. This validation ensures that the correct G/L date is captured in the voucher.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Prevent Approvals on Canceled Zero Cost Lines [690 : 11-Nov-2021]


The enhancement for Purchase Order Entry application (P4310) ensures that the system validates if the
order amount (OTOT) is changed while determining if the order will go back to the approval process. If
the order amount is not changed, then the already approved order lines do not go back to the approval
process while a zero cost purchase order line is canceled.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Lot Control for Purchase Transfer Order During Shipment Confirmation [700 : 28-Jun-2021]
Lot Control for Purchase Transfer Order During Shipment Confirmation
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: When performing a ship confirm, if the Inventory Lot Creation flag for the receiving branch
plant is turned off in Branch/Plant Constants, lot numbers are now automatically cleared for the
purchase transfer order, enabling receiving personnel to seamlessly receive the purchase transfer order.
Previously an error, based on the existence of lot numbers, prevented the purchase transfer order from
being received.

Omit Display of Penny Variances in Commitment Integrity Report [710 : 12-Nov-2021]


The Commitment Integrity report (R40910) now has a new processing option, which enables you to omit
the display of penny variances in the report. You can set a threshold value for the variance in the
processing option, below which the variance will not be displayed in the report. This enhancement
ensures that the system displays the information you need and makes it easier for you to review the
report.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Restrict Orders from Releasing Same Blanket Order Quantity [740 : 25-Aug-2022]
The Purchase Blanket Release (P43216) application has been enhanced to include record reservations
such that blanket orders will be locked at an order level (i.e. Order Number, Order Type, and Order
Company). That is, reserved blanket orders will be released only when the save or cancel button is
clicked on the P4310 detail revision. And, if another user tries to access the reserved orders, an error
will be prompted. The applications that will prompt the error are Blanket Release (P43216), Order
Release(P43060), and Order Detail (P4310). Hence, this enhancement ensures that two purchase
orders do not release the same blanket order quantity.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 35 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Accounting for Currency Fluctuations Impact on Retainage [760 : 11-Nov-2021]


For subcontract orders, when the exchange rate changes between the time of creating progress
payments to the time of releasing retainage, a variance amount is left in the Retainage Payable account
of the AA (Actual Amounts) ledger. This variance amount is left, even if the retainage is fully released
and thereby the debit and credit of Retainage Payable account in Account Ledger Inquiry program is not
balanced. Hence, this enhancement takes into account that change in exchange rate when releasing the
retainage, balances the debit and credit amount in the Retainage Payable account, and nets it to zero.
Thus, correcting the discrepancy in the Retainage Payable account, in the Account Ledger Inquiry
program.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Mandate Entry of Supplier Lot Info for PO Receipts [770 : 11-Nov-2021]


The supplier provides lot numbers, manufacturing dates, best before dates, and expiration dates for the
inventory that is received. The quality department requires this information to be recorded when the
shipment is received. To meet this requirement, in UDC H41|NR, three new UDCs have been added.
These UDCs are code 7 for supplier lot number and based on date, code 8 for supplier lot number,
based on date, and expiration date, and code 9 for supplier lot number, based on date, and best before
date. With this enhancement, you can use these UDCs for the Purchase Order Receipts program and
the Lot Master program, and thereby record important information provided by the supplier.
Note that the Based on Date can be considered as the Manufacturing Date.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Item Number Allowed in New Line When ACA Is Activated [780 : 11-Nov-2021]
In the Voucher Match application when adding a new line with line type J using option 4, you can now
enter the item number in that new line.
For this functionality, a new processing option Item Number Entry has been added in the New Order
Line tab in the Voucher Match application which enables the item number field, so that the item number
can be entered in the new line. This option can be used when Advanced Cost Accounting (ACA) is
activated and a three-way voucher match is being performed.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Improvements to Exchange Rate Variance Capture When Using Weighted Average Cost [800 : 09-
May-2023]
A configuration option has been added to the Voucher Match program to either include or exclude the
currency gain or loss amount in the item's weighted average cost and cardex for any exchange rate
difference between the purchase order receipt and voucher match. The system will continue to record
the exchange rate differences to the currency gain or loss variance account as it exists today. This
change helps to eliminate reconciliation gaps between the Cardex and General Ledger and ensures
compliance with IAS 21 that applies to foreign currency exchange transactions.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 36 of 202
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Requested Date Based on Workday Calendar [810 : 11-Nov-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne PO Generator program (P43011) will now automatically move the
requested date to the next working date if the calculated date is a non-working day. This eliminates the
need for procurement personnel to manually move the requested date in this situation.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Fixed in ENH 32116618

New Mass Update Report for Supplier Catalog Items [820 : 22-Jun-2022]
A new report Supplier Catalog Mass Update is now available for you to update the Effective From date,
Effective Thru date, and unit price of items in the supplier catalog. You can update these fields for
numerous items in a supplier catalog, based on your preferred data selection. This in turn significantly
reduces the time taken and possibility of human errors while updating the supplier catalog.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Simplified Update of Lot and Location During Receipt Route [840 : 20-Oct-2021]
The receiving personnel can easily change the lot details and location of items in the receipt route, as
these fields are now enabled in the Receipt Route Movement and Disposition program (P43250). This
enhancement makes the receiving process more efficient and faster by enabling the user to update lot
details and location when the items are in the receipt route, instead of having to take a row exit to the
Multiple Locations form for updating every lot. Additionally, the user can advance the items to the next
operation in the route after the lot or location is updated, or retain the items in the same operation.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of May 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Flexibility to Control Lot Grade Change During Receipt Routing and Reversal Process [850 : 30-
Dec-2021]
Configuration options have been added to keep the original lot grade or retain the new lot grade while
moving items to the previous step in the receipt route process or while reversing the receipt. The
Receipt Routing (P43250) and Purchase Receipts Inquiry (P43214) programs each include a new
processing option that provides flexibility to control the change in the lot grade during purchase order
receipt routing or reversal process as per business requirements.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Simplified Posting of G/L Batch [860 : 08-Apr-2021]


The process of posting G/L batches from Purchase Order Receipts has been simplified so that users no
longer have to confirm the posting of the batch in the Printer Selection form if the Automatic G/L Batch
processing option is set. The improved process has the added benefit of reducing the risk of users

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 37 of 202
accidentally clicking the Cancel button in the Printer Selection form which might result in data problems
with PA commitments.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Cancel Date Flexibility for Canceled Purchase Orders [870 : 22-Jun-2022]


Procurement personnel can now set a processing option to use the system date as the cancel date or
retain the pre-populated cancel date in the purchase order header and detail fields.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Control to Validate the Based On Date During Inventory Completions [880 : 21-Oct-2021]
A configuration option has been added to the PO Receipts program to validate the based on date
entered in the Multiple Locations form of the Receipt program, such that it is always prior to the receipt
date. This change provides a receiving agent the control to verify the based on date, which is used in
conjunction with the shelf life days, to accurately calculate the lot expiration date during inventory
completions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Improved User Experience of the Order Template Functionality [890 : 13-Oct-2021]


The Order Template program has been improved to enable a convenient search for an item from a large
list of items in a template. Additionally, during the purchase order creation, the system displays the
Order Template program only when a template is associated to the supplier on the purchase order.
These changes augment the user experience by further simplifying the purchase order creation process
due to elimination of the Order Template screen when not applicable.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Ability to Purge Logged Vouchers in the EDI Interface Table [900 : 13-Oct-2021]
A configuration option has been added to the Purge Batch Vouchers Report to purge redistributed or
canceled logged voucher records with process type value 2. This change provides the ability to remove
the orphaned logged vouchers in the EDI interface table, eliminating manual effort and shortening the
fulfilment cycle in a fully integrated supply chain system.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Ability to Base Tolerance Checking on Foreign or Domestic Amounts for Exchange Rate
Variances [910 : 13-Oct-2021]
The PO Receipts program has been improved to enable users to specify whether the system should
perform tolerance limit checking on the foreign or domestic amount when receiving an order that has a
variance in the exchange rate. This change enables receiving agents to apply exchange rate variances
on orders that are kept open as a reference for the prepayment of the item until the item is received, and

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 38 of 202
ensures that related financial data is captured accurately.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Simplified Method to Update Based-on-Date in the Purchase Order Receipts Program [920 : 09-
May-2023]
The Purchase Order Receipts program has been improved to include the Based-on-Date column in the
grid to capture the manufactured date of the item when the PO is received. Using the existing Lot
Information processing option in the Display tab of the Purchase Order Receipts program, you can
specify whether to display the Based-on-Date column in the grid along with other Lot-related columns.
This change simplifies the method to update the Based-on-Date value by eliminating the need to take
the row exit to the Multiple Locations form, thereby significantly reducing the receiving time.

Change: Added in Release 22


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Enabling Computation of Price Adjustment in Receipt Routing [930 : 13-Oct-2021]


The Receipt Routing Movement and Disposition program (P43250) has been improved to compute the
price adjustment based on the advanced pricing configuration and to capture the recalculated value in
the Unit Cost column of the Purchase Order Receiver File (F43121). During receipt routing, this change
enables the receiving agent to consider making the price adjustments to the unit cost value based on the
quality tests performed on the products received from the suppliers.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Ability to Match Vendor Invoices with Fees Using Voucher Match Automation [940 : 02-Nov-2022]
Accounts Payable personnel can now use the Voucher Match Automation program to perform a match
when a vendor invoice contains additional fees lines over the purchase orders or the purchase order
receipts and add those lines to the voucher and to the purchase order during voucher match automation.
This change simplifies and automates the processing of vendor invoices that contain fees information
and eliminates the manual creation of vouchers, thereby reducing labor costs and enabling timely
payment to the vendors.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Improved Data Quality in Purchase Date Revisions [950 : 21-Oct-2022]


The Purchase Date Revisions application is enhanced to protect the data quality of the purchase order
by preventing other applications from modifying the data when it is being updated. This change enables
you to perform date revisions on the purchase order without worrying about data integrity.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Enabling Outbound Interoperability in Purchase Order Receipts Inquiry [960 : 19-Oct-2022]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 39 of 202
The Purchase Order Receipts application is enhanced to capture the data in the Receipts Transaction
Table during purchase order receipt reversal, when outbound interoperability is configured in the
Purchase Order Receipts application. This change automates the exchange of information between the
Purchase Order Receipts application in the JD Edwards system and the third-party inventory interface,
thereby eliminating manual intervention to keep the data in sync.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Purchase Order Acknowledgment Approval to a Buyer or a Single Recipient [970 : 13-Jan-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has enhanced the Purchase Order Acknowledgement application in such a
way that the approval notification can also be sent to the buyer in purchase order detail line or to a
single Address Book number. When the quantity, unit cost, extended amount, or the promised delivery
date exceeds the tolerance acknowledged by the supplier, you can send the purchase order detail line
for approval to a buyer or to an Address Book number.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Avoid Opening Requisition Order When Purchase Order Line is Canceled during Receipt [980 :
06-Dec-2023]
JD Edwards Procurement Management has been enhanced with an option that enables you to prevent
the system from reopening the requisition order when the purchase order line is canceled using the
receipt option 9 (Cancel the Purchase Order Line) or closed using receipt option 7 (Receive and close
the Purchase Order Line).
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Enterprise Automation for Procurement [990 : 06-Dec-2023]


Enterprise Automation for procurement help customers to improve enterprise-wide operations through
integrated automation and generated data. The objectives are to:
- Expand the focus from individual transactions to the business as a whole.
- Make better use of existing data to reveal blind spots in a process.
- Define processes and data needed for better visibility and corrective action.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Requisition Self-Service

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Requisition Self-Service [240 : 12-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design
philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that provides the information you need to know at a glance with

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 40 of 202
alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway directly into the applications you need to use, when you
need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Requisition Self-Service:
- Requisition Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Preconfigured Notifications for Requisition Self-Service [250 : 12-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Requisition Self-Service. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Supplier Self-Service

Supplier Self Service Usability Improvements [220 : 11-May-2023]


Media object attachments will be incorporated within Supplier Self Service (SSS). This will enable
purchase order detail attachments (GT4311) to be applied within the Purchase order acknowledgement
application P43S01.

Also, the purchase order acknowledgement attachments (GT43S01) have been made available in
Purchase order inquiry application P43S05.

Version Processing Options will be validated to ensure the expected Supplier Self Service functionality
can be implemented and tested without any changes to default values.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 41 of 202
Additionally, the SSS implementation guide has been improved to support enhanced usability
improvments and corrected status flows.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution

Ability to Copy Supplier Configuration in Supplier Self Service [240 : 11-Apr-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne now provides its users the flexibility to copy a configuration of a supplier in
Supplier Self Service, to one or more suppliers thereby eliminating the need for creating a new
configuration for every instance thus enhancing their productivity.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 42 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

System Foundation
Address Book

Address Book Map JET Application [100 : 21-Oct-2022]


The new Address Book Map JET program provides an intuitive user experience with an improved UI and
visibility of address locations. Managers in
multiple departments can now take advantage of this program to easily locate Address Book records on
a map and view relevant information. They
will also benefit from easy access to common actions related to the Address Book records.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Alternate Language Descriptions for Address Book and Payment Terms [70 : 16-Oct-2017]
Users now have access to alternate language descriptions for the Address Book fields—Alpha Name,
Mailing Name and Address Lines. Customers can now store and present these descriptions in the
language of their users, customers, and suppliers, simplifying the experience for all users.

Users now have access to alternate language descriptions for Payment Terms. This enhancement will
help organizations communicate effectively with employees, customers, and suppliers by presenting
payment terms in their preferred languages.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Address Book Duplication Prevention [80 : 02-Jul-2020]


To alleviate the potential for duplicate records when you enter, revise, or upload address book records,
you are now provided with an improved duplicate address book validation. On activation, this validation
displays a list of potential duplicate entries when it finds records with either one of the following
combinations; the same alpha name, city, and ZIP code, or the same tax ID, postal code, and address.
These validations provide insight into whether a new address book record is necessary or an existing
one can be used. This change provides increased data accuracy, thereby enabling precise reporting.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 43 of 202
Address Book Legal Entity [90 : 12-Jun-2018]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Address Book system has been enhanced to provide users the ability to
enter the full legal name for any person, company, or other entity in the Address Book. This provides
users the ability to enter a legal description that exceeds the standard Address Book name field length.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Common Foundation

Company Business Interface [10 : 11-May-2023]


A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Business Interface developed for our Company Constants (F0010) table.
This Business Interface can query, insert, update, delete, and be notified of changes to Company
Constant records. This functionality provides a group of Business Services, Batch Processes for Import
and Export, and Real Time Events.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Business Unit Business Interface [20 : 11-May-2023]


A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Business Interface developed for our Business Unit Master (F0006) table.
This Business Interface can query, insert, update, delete, and be notified of changes to Business Unit
Master records. This functionality has a group of Business Services, Batch Processes for Import and
Export, and Real Time Events.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 44 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

One View Reporting


One View Reporting Foundation

One View Reporting Adoption of Oracle BI Publisher 11.1.1.7 [60 : 11-May-2023]


One View Reporting will be supported with the latest version of BI Publisher, 11.1.1.7. Packaged One
View Reports will be updated to BI Publisher version 11.1.1.7.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: One View reports will be supported for customers who upgrade to the latest version of BI
Publisher to take advantage of new features and performance improvements.

Drill Back from One View Reports [70 : 11-May-2023]


One View Reports will now include drill-back hyperlinks allowing users to drill back from a data table
within a One View report to the original transaction within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne. Drill backs paths
will be configurable, allowing customers to define both the report data to drill back on and the application
and form to drill into. For example, in a One View Customer Ledger report, a user may want to include a
drill back on Customer Number to the Customer Master application, or perhaps drill back on document
number, document type and document company to Standard Invoice Entry.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Users can monitor operations with One View, spot deviations, leverage the interactive filtering
available within the interactive viewer to filter the report down to the specific transaction or data that is
the source of the problem, and with a single click drill back to that transaction within the E1 application to
take action to correct it.
Examples: A Collection Manager may notice an increase in Overdue A/R. They use the filtering
capability to find the transactions that have the highest overdue amounts. The manager clicks on the
drill back hyperlink for the largest overdue invoice within the One View report data table which opens
that document in the Customer Ledger application where she can take action.

One View Reporting for Service Management

One View Reporting for Service Management - Overview [20 : 11-May-2023]


One View Reporting for Service Management improves insight across your customer service business
to ensure service commitments are being met, backlogs aren't building up and service contracts are

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 45 of 202
profitable. Users have the choice and flexibility of reporting based on case commitments, contract
attributes, and contract profitability. They have visibility into equipment usage, status or location history,
in addition to reporting on renewal fees associated with licenses and permits.

They can valuate fulfillment of preventative maintenance compared to planning and have insight into
completed, overdue and upcoming preventative maintenance schedules.

Analysis of work orders is available for a myriad of dimensions and attributes such as aging, load,
completion timeliness, and estimated vs. actual costs and hours. Planners and supervisors can easily
see where work orders are delayed and where efficiencies exist. Compare work order loads for past
periods; see how incoming rates relate to scheduled loads and completed work orders for each period.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Summary Industry:
Benefits: One View Service Management delivers a set of high-value reports to help keep your
customer service organization on track. Reports include service contract profitability, case aging,
expired-expiring contracts, preventive maintenance analysis, work order analysis, equipment status
analysis, equipment location analysis and many others. Improve bottom line performance for equipment
through detailed and summarized reports.

One View Case Management Inquiry [30 : 11-May-2023]


Use One View Case Management Inquiry to analyze cases for such measures as aging, how well case
commitments were met, overdue open cases, case loads, and other case statistics.

The reports delivered with the One View Case Management Inquiry application are:
- Case Aging
- Case Commitment Results
- Case Load
- Overdue Open Cases
- Case Statistics
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

One View Service Contract Inquiry [40 : 11-May-2023]


Use the One View Service Contract Inquiry to analyze contracts for such measures as expired or
expiring contracts, contracts by customers, contracts by inventory items, and contracts by equipment.

The reports delivered with the One View Service Contract Inquiry application are:
- Expired - Expiring Contracts
- Contracts by Inventory
- Contracts by Equipment
- Contracts by Customers
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

One View Service Contract Profitability Inquiry [50 : 11-May-2023]


Use the One View Service Contract Profitability Inquiry to analyze the profitability of your service
contracts. Profitability is the analysis of the revenue, credits, and costs associated with a service

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 46 of 202
contract. These come from contract billings, work order billings, and work order costs for equipment
covered by a service contract.

The report delivered with the One View Service Contract Profitability Inquiry application is the Service
Contract Profitability report.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

One View Reporting for Transportation Management

One View Reporting for Transportation Management - Overview [20 : 11-May-2023]


One View Reporting for Transportation Management delivers pre-built query application for process
specific reporting and Report layouts built in BI Publisher. The applications simplify data formatting for
end user reporting usage, include columns specific for reporting, retrieve stored and calculated fields,
and deliver pre-built table joins. The report layouts deliver pre-built content that allow end users to easily
customize or create new report layouts, and provide a graphical representation of transactional data.

This module is delivered with the following applications:


- One View Transportation Shipment Inquiry
- One View Transportation Load Inquiry
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Summary Industry:
Benefits: With One View Reporting for Transportation Management, users are empowered to create
reports and perform trending analysis of their shipping and loads. Thereby, users will be able to gain
views of their freight spend, on time analysis and target overall transportation improvements through
detailed and summarized reports.

One View Transportation Shipment Inquiry [30 : 11-May-2023]


Use One View Transportation Shipment Inquiry to query shipment numbers and create transportation
shipment inquiry reports.

This application provides the ability to create and run reports on current shipments including freight
charges and shipment depot information, such as: on time shipments by shipment depot, shipment
depot totals by year and month, shipment freight charges by shipment depot, and shipment value by
shipment depot.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

One View Transportation Load Inquiry [40 : 11-May-2023]


Use the One View Transportation Load Inquiry to query load numbers and create transportation load
inquiry reports.

This application provides the ability to create and run reports on current loads including freight charges,
vehicle utilization and shipment depot information, such as: load distance by shipment depot and carrier,
load bulk volume by shipment depot and date, load freight by planning depot, load payable freight by
carrier and planning depot, and vehicle utilization by planning depot.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 47 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

One View Reporting for Warehouse Management

One View Reporting for Warehouse Management - Overview [10 : 11-May-2023]


One View Reporting for Warehouse Management delivers pre-built query applications for process
specific reporting and report layouts built in BI Publisher. The applications simplify data formatting for
end users, including columns specific for reporting, retrieving stored and calculated fields, and delivering
pre-built table joins.

The report layouts deliver pre-built content that allow end users to easily customize or create new report
layouts, and provides a graphical representation of transactional data.

Several OVR applications and their respective reports are being deployed to support:
- Warehouse Requests
- Warehouse Suggestions
- Warehouse License Plate Inquiry
- Warehouse Location Capacity/ Analysis

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making:
- With One View Reporting for Warehouse Management, users gain a better understanding of their
warehouse efficiencies.
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts and graphs to make informed business decisions.
- Perform analysis on your warehouse movements to understand your problem areas
Turn Data into Knowledge:
- Know where how effective your warehouse picking, putaway, and replenishment are based upon
historical and analysis of trends.

One View Warehouse Request Inquiry [20 : 11-May-2023]


Use One View Warehouse Request Inquiry to query confirmed warehouse request information and
create warehouse requests inquiry reports. This application provides the ability to create and run reports
on current confirmed warehouse requests for a specific branch/plant and provides comparative
information for putaway, picking, and replenishment requests. You can set up reports to run based on
any combination of filter fields in the header of the One View Warehouse Request Inquiry form. You can
review warehouse requests to analyze trends with to items and the amount of time to process
warehouse requests through various statuses in the movement process.

The reports delivered with the One View Warehouse Request Inquiry application are:
- Warehouse Pick Request Analysis
- Warehouse Putaway Request Analysis
- Warehouse Replenishment Request Analysis
- Warehouse Request Summary
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 48 of 202
- With One View Reporting for Warehouse Management, users gain a better understanding of their
warehouse efficiencies.
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts and graphs to make informed business decisions.
- Perform analysis on your warehouse movements to understand your problem areas
Turn Data into Knowledge:
- Know where how effective your warehouse picking, putaway, and replenishment are based upon
historical and analysis of trends.

One View Warehouse Suggestion Inquiry [30 : 11-May-2023]


Use One View Warehouse Suggestion Inquiry to query suggested picking, putaway, and replenishment
location information and create suggested picking, putaway, and replenishment location inquiry reports.
This application provides the ability to create and run reports on current picking, putaway, and
replenishment suggestions for a specific branch/plant. You can set up reports to run based on any
combination of filter fields in the header of the One View Warehouse Suggestion Inquiry form.

The reports delivered with the One View Warehouse Suggestion Inquiry application are:
- Warehouse Location Velocity Analysis
- Warehouse Suggestion Productivity Analysis
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making:
- With One View Reporting for Warehouse Management, users gain a better understanding of their
warehouse efficiencies.
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts and graphs to make informed business decisions.
- Perform analysis on your warehouse movements to understand your problem areas
Turn Data into Knowledge:
- Know where how effective your warehouse picking, putaway, and replenishment are based upon
historical and analysis of trends.

One View License Plate Quantity Inquiry [40 : 11-May-2023]


Use One View License Plate Quantity Inquiry to query license plate information associated with
locations. The application provides the ability to create and run reports to display the license plate
numbers associated to the location and compare how much of the location has been utilized by the
license plate to how much capacity the location can support. You can set up reports to run based on any
combination of filter fields in the header of the One View License Plate Quantity Inquiry form.

The report delivered with the One View License Plate Quantity Inquiry is the License Plate Quantity
Analysis report.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making:
- With One View Reporting for Warehouse Management, users gain a better understanding of their
warehouse efficiencies.
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts and graphs to make informed business decisions.
- Perform analysis on your warehouse movements to understand your problem areas
Turn Data into Knowledge:
- Know where how effective your warehouse picking, putaway, and replenishment are based upon
historical and analysis of trends.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 49 of 202
One View Warehouse Location Inquiry [50 : 11-May-2023]
Use One View Warehouse Location Inquiry to query location capacity and percentage fill information
and create reports that provide a snapshot of the capacity and percentage fill of a location in the
warehouse.

This application provides the ability to query by percentage of space used and display all the locators
below or above a certain percentage. It can also be used to find empty locators. The percentage usage
can be queried by units, volume, and weight. Distribution managers may use this information to create
replenishment transactions, run the min-max report, or analyze item locator storage relationships. You
can set up reports to run based on any combination of filter fields in the header of the One View
Warehouse Location Inquiry form.

The reports delivered with the One View Warehouse Location Inquiry application are:
- Warehouse Location Usage Analysis
- Warehouse Utilization Analysis
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making:
- With One View Reporting for Warehouse Management, users gain a better understanding of their
warehouse efficiencies.
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts and graphs to make informed business decisions.
- Perform analysis on your warehouse movements to understand your problem areas
Turn Data into Knowledge:
- Know where how effective your warehouse picking, putaway, and replenishment are based upon
historical and analysis of trends.

One View Reporting for Rental Management

One View Reporting for Rental Management [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne One View Reporting for Rental Management has been made available for
customers on EnterpriseOne 9.1. One View Reporting for Rental Management delivers pre-built query
applications and report layouts built with Oracle BI Publisher. The applications simplify data formatting
for end user reporting usage, include columns specific for reporting, retrieve stored and calculated fields,
and deliver pre-built table joins. The report layouts deliver pre-built content that allow end users to easily
customize or create new report layouts, and provide a graphical representation of transactional data.
Reports provide real-time access to operational data that users can view as lists, charts, and graphs.
Requires One View Reporting Foundation module to operate.

Three One View Reporting applications are available for Rental Management:
- Rental Contract Inquiry
- Rental Contract Profitability Inquiry
- Related Order Inquiry.

These applications are delivered with pre-defined reports. Users can also create custom reports for
many business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Improve insight of your rental business enhances real-time decision making, improve
customer relationships, and decrease the cost of reporting. Rental companies can accurately assess the

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 50 of 202
health of their business with their customers at any point in time, analyze rental trends, and plan
accordingly. Users can know which items are rented the most, which items are sold the most, who are
their top customers, and so on.

One View Rental Contract Inquiry [20 : 18-Apr-2015]


One View Rental Contract Inquiry application is one of the three One View Reporting applications for
Rental Management that has been made available for customers on EnterpriseOne 9.1. One View
Rental Contract Inquiry application provides rental companies the choice and flexibility to inquire and
report on their rental contracts using a vast range of queries.

Five high-value reports are delivered with the One View Rental Contract Inquiry application:
- Contracts by Customer
- Contracts by Business Unit
- Contracts by Asset
- Contracts by Inventory
- Expired/Expiring Contracts

In addition to these five reports delivered with the application, users can use this application to create
custom reports.

These pre-defined reports include drill-back hyperlinks allowing users to drill back from a data table
within the report to the original record within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne. For example, in a One View
Contracts by Customer report, a user may want to include a drill back on a Contract Number to the
Rental Contract Entry application (P54R10), or perhaps drill back on customer number to the Work with
Addresses application (P01012).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Users can monitor rental contract operations with One View Rental Contract Inquiry
application, spot deviations and slow-down, leverage the interactive filtering available within the
interactive viewer to filter the report down to the specific data that is the source of concern, and with a
single click drill back to that record within the E1 application to analyze it further.

One View Rental Contract Profitability Inquiry [30 : 18-Apr-2015]


The One View Rental Contract Profitability Inquiry application is one of the three One View Reporting
applications for Rental Management that has been made available for customers on EnterpriseOne 9.1.
The One View Rental Contract Profitability Inquiry application gives rental companies the choice and
flexibility of reporting on a wide range of measures to analyze the profitability of their rental business.
This application includes calculated columns for related order cost and revenue (from sales order
invoice and service order billings), and rental cost and revenue (from rental billings).

The Rental Contract Profitability report is delivered with the One View Rental Contract Inquiry
application. This report includes a collapsible pivot table that enables users to get a birds-eye-view of
the revenue, cost, and profit of their rental business, with drill down information of the amounts
distributed by customers, rental contracts associated with them, and the items that are rented.
In addition to this pre-defined report, users can use this application to create custom reports.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 51 of 202
One View Related Order Inquiry [40 : 18-Apr-2015]
The One View Related Order Inquiry application is one of the three One View Reporting applications for
Rental Management that has been made available for customers on EnterpriseOne 9.1. The One View
Rental Contract Profitability Inquiry application gives rental companies the choice and flexibility of
reporting on a wide range of measures to analyze rental contract sales and work orders.

Three high-value reports are delivered with the One View Related Order Inquiry application:
- Related Order Summary
- Related Sales Orders
- Related Work Orders

In addition to these pre-defined reports, end users can use this application to create custom reports.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

One View Reporting for Outbound Inventory Management

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne One View Reporting for Outbound Inventory Management [10 : 11-
May-2023]
You use One View Reporting for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound Inventory Management to
analyze:
• Outbound agreements
• Outbound agreement quantity information
• Outbound inventory value
• Age of outbound inventory
• Outbound inventory consumption
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: The benefits of using One View Reporting for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Outbound
Inventory Management include but are not restricted to:
• Improved understanding of consigned and VMI businesses
• Informed business decision making by reviewing shipped, received, consumed and billed outbound
inventory
• Improved outbound inventory management by reviewing reports based on age and value of inventory
• Improved performance of your supply chain process by better negotiation of inventory consumption
terms

One View Reporting for Financials

One View Financial Statements [30 : 21-Jun-2018]


This feature provides the financial users that are responsible for financial statements and reports the
ability to design and produce them without needing technical knowledge of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
or assistance from their IT department. Users will be able to create financial statements such as a
Balance Sheet or Income Statement through a very user-friendly application interface. This new feature
utilizes the One View Reporting Foundation to format and run these financial statements and reports
using BI Publisher, providing a more modern look and feel. Pre-built content will accompany this feature
to enable users to quickly come up to speed on the functionality.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 52 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The One View Financial Statements feature puts the power of financial statement creation
and generation into the hands of the financial staff responsible for financial reporting. Financial staff will
no longer need to rely on the IT department to design, maintain, and deploy financial statements.

One View Reporting for Health and Safety Incident Management

One View Reporting for Health and Safety Incident Management - Overview [10 : 11-May-2023]
The One View Reporting programs for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Health and Safety Incident
Management system enable you to analyze incidents by the people involved, equipment involved, key
incident attributes, incident classifications, costs, and environmental impact details. You can associate
an incident with different types of records, for example, people records, equipment records, and so on.
These records are associated to the incident in a one-to-many relationship, which means that an
incident can have many people or many equipment records associated with it. These records are related
to the incident, however, they may not be related to each other. You can also associate an incident with
other types of records, such as agencies, tasks, environmental impact details and costs, in a one-to-
many relationship. The One View Reporting for Health and Safety Incident Management programs
facilitate searching and reporting on incidents, people, equipment, and environmental impact records,
and calculates safety metrics.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Enhance Real-Time Decision Making
- Use interactive reports with lists, charts, and graphs to drill down to the level of detail required to
make informed business decisions
- Perform analysis on your incidents to understand your problem areas
- Analyze your incidents for incident rates, trends, and costs

Turn Data Into Knowledge!


- Know where and when your incidents are occurring
- Review, understand, and act upon incident data to decrease future incidents and reduces liability
- Analyze incidents to better understand contributing factors
- Calculate valuable incident rates for reporting

Decrease the Cost of Reporting


- Enable end users to design, create, run, and share reports
- Provide users real time access to operational data
- Codes vs. descriptions, group and sum by category code, table vs. chart….View your data the way
you want to view it!
- Free up IT resources for projects
- Edit rather than compose for fast, on the fly end user reporting

One View Incident Summary Inquiry [20 : 11-May-2023]


You use One View Incident Summary Inquiry to analyze and summarize health and safety incidents.

This application enables you to determine common traits or trends for your incidents. For example, you
can view incidents by type or by other factors such as people, security, environmental, equipment, or
property damage. You can also analyze the incident costs to compare incidents based on the attributes
or traits. These reports provide information on possible causal factors and incidents by month.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 53 of 202
One View Incident Summary Inquiry is delivered with two pre-defined reports. These reports are:
- Incident Attributes
- Incident Costs

With these delivered reports, you can see an analysis related to key incident attributes such as
organization, date of incident, causal factor, third party related incidents, severity, status, type of incident
and actual and estimated costs.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

One View Incident People Inquiry [30 : 11-May-2023]


You use One View Incident People Inquiry application to analyze and summarize the people involved in
health and safety incidents, and their illnesses and injuries.

This application enables you to understand who is involved in incidents, their role and what type of
injuries or illnesses are occurring to identify trends for your incidents. For example, if one type of injury is
occurring more often than others, this indicates a need to provide more training or safety equipment.
The reports provide information on who was involved, employees or third parties, what types of incidents
result in injuries, an analysis of reported injuries, and injury or illness details.

One View Incident People Inquiry is delivered with four pre-defined reports. These reports are:
- Incidents Involving People
- Summary of Injured People
- Reportable Injury/Illness Summary
- Detailed Injury/Illness Summary.

In these delivered reports, you can see an analysis related to the people involved in the incidents and
information about their injuries and illnesses.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

One View Incident Equipment Inquiry [40 : 11-May-2023]


You use the One View Incident Equipment Inquiry application to analyze and summarize the equipment,
property and motor vehicles involved in health and safety incidents.

This application enables you to understand damaged property or vehicles involved in your incidents.
This provides useful information when replacement equipment is being considered to understand if more
training on certain types of equipment is needed, or if certain types of equipment are more prone to be
involved in incidents.

The One View Incident Equipment Inquiry is delivered with four pre-defined reports. These reports are:
- Property / Equipment Summary
- Motor Vehicle Summary
- Non-Motor Vehicle Summary
- Operator / Driver Summary.

With these delivered reports you can see an analysis related to the equipment involved in incidents and
information about their operators or drivers.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 54 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

One View Environmental Incident Inquiry [50 : 11-May-2023]


You use the Environmental Incident Inquiry application to analyze and summarize the environmental
impact of the incidents.

This application enables you to understand the environmental impact for your incidents, and determine if
some products are involved in more incidents than others. This provides useful information to determine
if your procedures in handling products have to be modified or if more training is needed.

One View Environmental Incident Inquiry is delivered with one pre-defined report, Environmental
Incidents. In the Environmental Incident report you see an analysis related to the products and
environmental impact involved in your incidents.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

One View Safety Statistics Inquiry [60 : 11-May-2023]


You use the One View Safety Statistics Inquiry application (P54HS260) to calculate and report incident
frequency and impact rates.

This application provides the ability to determine how frequently incidents occur. For example, per
month, per employee or per safety hour, along with the impact of those incidents, such as incident cost
or days lost. It dives into reportable incidents such as those required to be reported to OSHA, and
analyzing by incident types.

The One View Safety Statistics Inquiry is delivered with four pre-defined reports. These reports are:
- Monthly Incident Safety Statistics
- Safety Statistics for Reportable Cases
- Safety Statistics by Incident Type
- Incident Impact Rates.

With these delivered reports you can get an analysis related to key incident attributes such as
organization, date of incident, third party related incidents, type of incident, incident costs, and days
away from work.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 55 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Mobile Enterprise Applications


Accounts Payable: Contact Supplier Mobile Smartphone

Contact Supplier Mobile Smartphone [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


Mobile application for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Capital Asset Management: Create Work Order Mobile Tablet

Create Work Order Mobile Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Create Work Order Mobile Tablet allows a maintenance technician to create
a new work order for a company owned asset that requires maintenance. On the new work order the
equipment, failure description, and other key information, such as branch, priority, customer/site,
assigned to/supervisor, requested finish date, and notes and photos can be added.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management
system.

You can scan bar codes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan bar codes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions
makes mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Service Management: Manage Customer Equipment Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Manage Customer Equipment Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 11-Apr-2015]


These companion mobile applications allow a service technician to manage the customers equipment.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage Customer Equipment Mobile Smartphone allows the field service
engineers to search for and view characteristics for customer's equipment with the ability to update
equipment information, add notes, add photos. Additionally they can update the equipment status and
see core dates, view a map of the site, and see whether work orders are allowed or meter readings are
required.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 56 of 202
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage Customer Equipment Mobile Tablet allows the field service
engineers to search for and view characteristics for customer's equipment with the ability to update
equipment information, add notes, add photos. Additionally they can update the equipment status and
see core dates, view a map of the site, and see whether work orders are allowed or meter readings are
required. Additionally, the tablet application allows the technician to view the PM backlog and repair
history related to the equipment. They can also enter a current meter reading for any of the 6 equipment
meters.

These 2 applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Locate Equipment in Proximity Using the Manage Customer Equipment Mobile Tablet and
Smartphone [20 : 21-Jun-2018]
Using the Manage Customer Equipment mobile applications, you can search for equipment. The system
displays an interactive map indicating the location of all the equipment within the radius that you specify.
You can drill down further to view the details of a piece of equipment.

You can use location services to search for equipment based on the proximity to your location or
another reference point.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Service technicians who are out on the field to repair equipment can easily search for all the
equipment closest to them within a specific radius. This can optimize travel time of service technicians.

Capital Asset Management: Manage Equipment Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Manage Equipment Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


These companion mobile applications allows a technician to manage company owned equipment

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage Equipment Mobile Tablet application allows maintenance


technicians or supervisors to view equipment information for company owned equipment, update status
and location, enter a current meter reading for the equipment, view the PM backlog, view repair history
for the equipment, see a map of the equipment site location, and see a map based on the geo-
coordinates location. It also provides for viewing photos and adding and updating notes.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage Equipment Mobile Smartphone application allows maintenance


technicians or supervisors to view equipment information for company owned equipment, update status
and location, see a map of the equipment site location, and see a map based on the geo-coordinates
location. It also provides for viewing and adding photos and adding and updating notes.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 57 of 202
Capital Asset Management: Manage My Work Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Manage My Work Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]


These companion mobile applications allow a technician to manager their equipment work orders.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage My Work Orders Mobile Tablet application allows maintenance
technicians to review and update equipment work orders that they are assigned to. After selecting a
work order from the list in the left side pane (search and filter ability for the list), the user will be able to
see some core fields for the work order, update the work order status and actual finish date, see a map
of the equipment site and geo-coordinates, see and add notes and view photos. The user will also be
able to issue listed parts to the work orders.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage My Work Orders Mobile Smartphone application allows the
maintenance technician to review equipment work orders that they are assigned to. After selecting a
work order from the list in the left side pane (search and filter ability for the list), the user will be able to
see some core fields for the work order and see a map of the equipment site and geo-coordinates. They
will also be able to see photos attached to the work order and associated equipment. They will be able
to add photos attached to the work order.

These applications leverage functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management
system.

You can scan barcodes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan barcodes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions makes
mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Disconnected Mode: Manage My Work Orders Mobile Tablet and Smartphone [20 : 21-Jun-2018]
When using the Manage My Work Orders Disconnected mobile tablet and smartphone application,
users can update work orders when they are not connected to the network. To successfully make
changes to work orders using the disconnected method, users must load EnterpriseOne data onto the
tablet while connected to the network. After the data is loaded, users can update the data on the device
while disconnected from the network. The changes are stored locally, and the work order records are
marked as changed. When the user connects to the EnterpriseOne network again, they can upload the
changes from their mobile tablet to the EnterpriseOne database.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Users can update work order records when they are away from the office, and their mobile
device is not connected to the EnterpriseOne server. Enabling field workers to update data on a mobile
device while disconnected can assist users in completing job duties even if service to their mobile device
is interrupted or unavailable.

Capital Asset Management: Review Team Work Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Review Team Work Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]
These companion mobile applications allow a maintenance supervisor to view and manage equipment

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 58 of 202
work orders assigned to his team.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Review Team Work Orders Mobile Smartphone allows maintenance
supervisors to manage the work orders assigned to his team members. They can view and filter a list of
work orders and drill down into the details. Core details shown include the equipment, failure, key dates
and personnel assigned, along with site information. A map of the location can be shown and photos
can be managed related to the work order.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Review Team Work Orders Mobile Tablet allows maintenance supervisors
to manage the work orders assigned to his team members. They can view and filter a list of work orders
and drill down into the details. Core details shown include the equipment, failure, key dates and
personnel assigned, along with site information. A map of the location can be shown and photos can be
managed related to the work order. The tablet application also presents a graphical display of work
orders by site and by assigned to. The user can see parts and labor related to the work order, view and
enter notes and update status and dates.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset
Management system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Case Management: Manage Cases Mobile Smartphone

Manage Cases Mobile Smartphone [10 : 08-Apr-2015]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage Cases Mobile Smartphone allows a supervisor to view reported
cases. The user can drill down into the details and see core information about the case including the
description, status, equipment, customer, site and commitment date. Additionally, photos can be added.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Case Management system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Case Management: Quick Case Entry Mobile Smartphone

Quick Case Entry Mobile Smartphone [10 : 08-Apr-2015]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Quick Case Entry Mobile Smartphone application allows employees to
review a list of the cases they have entered or are assigned to, and to select a case and look at the core
details and view or add photos. Additionally, they can create a new case by easily and quickly entering
some core information and adding photos.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Case Management.


Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Case Management: Review Cases Mobile Tablet

Review Cases Mobile Tablet [10 : 11-Apr-2015]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 59 of 202
Mobile application for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Expense Management: Expense Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Expense Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]


Mobile application for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Health and Safety: Health and Safety Scoreboard Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Health and Safety Scoreboard Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]
These companion mobile applications allow a safety officer or executive to see a summarized view of
recent incidents and drill down into the details.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Health and Safety Scoreboard Mobile Tablet application allows the safety
executive to review the safety scoreboard and incident counts, including a graph, and dive into the
details of the incidents behind a count. The executive will also be able to see some core information,
including maps of the incident location.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Health and Safety Scoreboard Mobile Smartphone application allows the
safety executive to review the safety scoreboard and incident counts, and dive into the details of the
incidents behind a count. The executive will also be able to view any photos associated with the incident
master and see some core information, including a map of the incident location.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Health & Safety Incident
Management system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Health and Safety: Report an Incident Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Report an Incident Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 09-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Report an Incident Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications enable
any employee to report an incident on the spot including core details, such as What, When, and Where.
Employees can see a list of the incidents that they are involved in, and add and view photos. The
location settings of the devices enable users to automatically record location coordinates for the
incident. They can also add people associated with the incident.

These applications leverage functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Health & Safety Incident
Management system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 60 of 202
Human Resources: Contact Employee Mobile Smartphone

Contact Employee Mobile Smartphone Application [1000 : 13-Aug-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Contact Employee Smartphone application allows users to search for,
view, and contact employees in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from a smartphone device. When viewing
employee organization, contact and location information, users can tap links to initiate an action:
tapping a phone number initiates a phone call, tapping an e-mail address starts an e-mail, tapping a
message icon initiates a text message, and tapping a work location address launches a map. From JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Contact Employee, you can also add a contact you are viewing to the contacts
feature on your device.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Capital Management
and Address Book systems.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: - An enabled mobile workforce that can perform tasks while they are away from their desk
reducing delays and bottle necks that impact the execution of work.

- Increase end user satisfaction by providing applications in the platform that support users needs and
expectations.

- Reduce cost of ownership associated with deploying third party mobile applications and/or custom built
solutions.
Notes: - Supported on smart devices such as iPhone, Blackberry or Droid
- Support connected mode of operation
- Support language translations

Service Management: Create Service Order Mobile Tablet

Create Service Order Mobile Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Create Service Order Mobile Tablet allows a field service engineer to create
a new service order for a customer who requires service. On the new service order the equipment,
failure description, and other key information, such as branch, priority, customer/site, assigned
to/supervisor, requested finish date, and notes and photos can be added.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management
system.

You can scan barcodes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan barcodes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions makes
mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Service Management: Manage My Service Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Manage My Service Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 61 of 202
These companion mobile applications allow a technician to manage his service orders.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage My Service Orders Mobile Smartphone application allows the
service technician to view and manage a list of service orders assigned to them. They can view Service
Order details, view photos, and attach new ones. Specifically, they can see the service order
description, equipment, priority, status, planned start date and planned completion date. Customer and
site information is also available, including contact information for the customer and a map of the
location.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Manage My Service Orders Mobile Tablet application allows the service
technician to view and manage a list of service orders assigned to them. They can view Service Order
details, view photos, and attach new ones. Specifically, they can see the service order description,
equipment, priority, planned start date and planned completion date. Customer and site information is
also available, including contact information for the customer and a map of the location. They can
update the service order status and actual finish date, view parts and labor, and view and add notes.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Service Management: Review Team Service Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Review Team Service Orders Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]
These companion mobile applications allow a service supervisor to view and manage service orders for
his team.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Review Team Service Orders Mobile Smartphone application allows field
service supervisors to manage the service orders assigned to their team. They can view and filter a list
of work orders and drill down into the details. Core details shown include the equipment, failure, key
dates and personnel assigned, along with site information. A map of the location can be shown and
photos can be managed related to the service order.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Review Team Service Orders Mobile Tablet application allows field service
supervisors to manage the service orders assigned to his team members. They can view and filter a list
of service orders and drill down into the details. Core details shown include the equipment, failure, key
dates and personnel assigned, along with site information. A map of the location can be shown and
photos can be managed related to the service order. The tablet application also presents a graphical
display of service orders by site and by assigned to. The user can see parts and labor related to the
service order, view and enter notes and update status and dates.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Service Management: Service Work Order Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Service Work Order Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 62 of 202
These companion mobile applications allow a service technician to enter his time against service orders.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Equipment Service Work Order Time Entry Mobile Smartphone application
allows field service technicians to create and view timecards associated with work completed on
customer owned equipment (enter time for work performed via service orders). The can see a list of time
entered for the past 7 days and drill down into the details.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Equipment Service Work Order Time Entry Mobile Tablet application allows
field service technicians to create and view timecards associated with work completed on customer
owned equipment (enter time for work performed via service orders). The can see a list of time entered
for the past 7 days and drill down into the details. The time is also presented via a graph.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Service Management: Template Meter Reading Mobile Tablet

Service Management: Template Meter Reading Mobile Tablet [10 : 08-Apr-2015]


The D Edwards EnterpriseOne Template Meter Reading Mobile Tablet application allows a maintenance
technician or supervisor to load a list of equipment using a speed meter reading template and quickly
and easily enter the New Reading or Net Increase for today.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management and
CRM Service Management systems.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Sales Order Management: Customer Order Overview Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Customer Order Overview Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [20 : 01-Jul-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Customer Order Overview Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications
enable users to review customer order header information, such as order number, branch/plant, and
order date, customer order counts for back orders, held orders, open orders, and quote orders, and
order detail information, such as quantity, unit price, last status, next status, ship to, requested date,
promised delivery date and scheduled pick date. The applications provide access to customer contact
information including names, phone numbers, email addresses, and addresses. The applications also
enable users to view customer contacts, add customer contact information, use the mapping and
navigation features of the device to locate the customer site, and send e-mail messages to customer
contacts. Only the smartphone application provides the ability to call customer contacts.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Order Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 63 of 202
Procurement: Purchase Order Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Puchase Order Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Purchase Order Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications
enable procurement personnel to review, approve, and reject purchase orders. Users can review orders
currently awaiting approval , view up to ten different order types, enter line-level remarks on orders,
configure the order type names that appear in the mobile applications, approve or reject orders, and
enter order-level remarks when approving or rejecting an order.

The applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Procurement system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

PO Approval Mobile Application [40 : 13-Oct-2021]


The JD Edwards PO Approval mobile application is a progressive web application developed using
Visual Builder Cloud Service (VBCS) and orchestrations to access JD Edwards data and business logic.
You can render this application on smartphones, tablets, and desktops through a URL. With the PO
Approval progressive web application, you have the flexibility to approve or reject the various purchase
order types from your smartphone, tablet, laptop, or desktop.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Requisition Self-Service: Requisition Self-Service Approval Mobile Smartphone and


Tablet

Requisition Self-Service Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Requisition Self-Service Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet
applications enable managers and buyers to review, approve, and reject requisition self-service orders.
Managers use the applications to review and approve or reject order-level requisition self-service orders
entered by their employees. Buyers for the organization can use the applications to review and approve
or reject line-level requisition self-service orders. They can also enter remarks regarding why a
requisition self-service order is approved or rejected.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Requisition Self-Service
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Warehouse Management: Warehouse Availability Mobile Tablet

Warehouse Availability Mobile Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Warehouse Availability Tablet application enables warehouse
personnel to review warehouse inventory balance information. For a non-license plate warehouse, the
application enables warehouse personnel to view inventory balance information and warehouse detail
information.
For a license plate warehouse, the application displays inventory balance information, warehouse detail

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 64 of 202
information, and license plate detail information.
Users can limit the search results based on branch/plant, item, location, lot, and parent license plate. In
addition, users can view loose quantities.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Warehouse Management
system.

You can scan bar codes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan bar codes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions
makes mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Inventory Management: Inventory Availability Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Inventory Availability Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Inventory Availability Smartphone and Tablet applications enable
inventory controllers and personnel to view inventory item availability across branch/plants, lots and
locations, and at various unit of measure levels. Users can access summary information to determine
the item quantities they have on-hand, committed, and available. In addition, they can use the
applications to monitor supply and demand to determine future stocking needs.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Inventory Management
system.

You can scan bar codes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device. Currently, this
facility is available in the tablet application only in Android devices.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan bar codes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions
makes mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Accounts Receivable: Contact Customer Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Contact Customer Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Feb-2017]


The Contact Customer for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne SmartPhone and Tablet application allows users
needing to contact a customer to view the customer's address and locate it on a map, view all the
contacts for the customer, send an e-mail to a customer contact, and call the contact directly from the
application.

This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable and
Address Book systems.Search for a customer and locate their address, main phone number, and list of
contacts. Also provides an overview of key attributes about the customer.

You can use location services to search for a customer based on the proximity to your location or
another reference point.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 65 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Job Progress Entry Mobile Tablet

Job Progress Entry Mobile Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards Job Progress Entry Mobile Tablet application enables project managers and others to
review and update the progress of a project for each cost code.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Manage Cost Code Schedule Mobile Tablet

Manage Cost Code Schedule Mobile Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Cost Code Schedule Mobile Tablet application enables the project
manager to set up a cost code schedule for the tasks within each job to establish a chronological order
for the tasks sequentially or concurrently, as needed. To create a job schedule, the project managers
enters the planned start and finish dates for each task within the job.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Field Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Field Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Field Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications enable
project managers to easily review the cost code details of a job by account. Project managers have the
ability to review project financial information by cost code, and to add notes and photos to each cost
code record. Users can set up the field names they would like to see in the mobile applications in
correspondence to the Job Status Inquiry program. They can also set up the mobile applications to
display the same information as the Job Status Inquiry program or a subset of this information.

In addition, users can add new cost code records to a job and to update the details of a selected record
using the Mobile Tablet application.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Project Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Project Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Status Review Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications
enable project managers to review and update job information. Project managers can search and view

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 66 of 202
job details, view job number and job description, review amounts for a specific job, and view and add
notes and photos for a job. In addition, the map and navigation features of the device enable users to
locate the job site address.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Project Costing: Change Request Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Change Request Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Change Request Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications
enable project managers to enter new change requests or review and update existing change requests
with the detailed information required to track changes to a project, contract or subcontract. As the
project progresses, project managers have the ability to easily record and monitor project changes.
Depending on the configuration, project managers can also use these applications to approve change
requests.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Change Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Change Request Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Change Request Approval Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Change Request Approval Mobile Smartphone and Table applications
enable project managers to view and update the status of change requests and the line items
associated with change requests that are awaiting approval.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Change Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Field Progress Entry Mobile Tablet

Field Progress Entry Mobile Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Field Progress Entry Mobile Tablet application enables project
managers to review and update various types of field progress information. For example, project
managers can enter time cards for a work crew on a project, for direct report employees, as well as for
employees for whom the project manager has delegate rights. In addition, project managers can enter
billing information for equipment, compare budgeted units with actual units, and review and update
account progress.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 67 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Time and Labor: Field Progress Labor Entry Mobile Smartphone

Field Progress Labor Entry Mobile Smartphone [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Field Progress Labor Entry Mobile Smartphone application enables
project managers to enter time cards for work crews on projects, as well as direct report employees and
employees for whom the project manager has delegate rights. The application provides a filter for
reviewing a range of cost codes.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Time and Labor system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Project Costing: Field Progress Equipment Entry Mobile Smartphone

Field Progress Equipment Entry Mobile Smartphone [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Field Progress Equipment Entry Mobile Smartphone application
enables project managers to enter equipment time entry information by job and cost code.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Project Costing: Field Account Progress Entry Mobile Smartphone

Field Account Progress Entry Mobile Smartphone [10 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Field Account Progress Entry Mobile Smartphone application enables
project managers to review and update account progress for projects by job and cost code.

This application leverages functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Project Costing system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Accounts Receivable: Customer Account Overview Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Customer Account Overview Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


The Customer Account Overview for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tablet and SmartPhone applications
allow sales representatives to view contact and financial information for a customer. View the customer'
s address and locate it on a map, view all the contacts for the customer, send an e-mail to a customer
contact, or when utilizing a SmartPhone, call the contact directly from the application. The financial
information that can be viewed includes credit and collection managers, credit limits, date the account
was opened, last invoice information, unapplied receipt amount, open and past due invoice amounts, as
well as amount aging information.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 68 of 202
This application leverages functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable,Credit
and Collection, and Address Book systems.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Accounts Receivable: Receipt Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Receipt Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 12-May-2015]


You use the Receipt Batch Approvals mobile applications to review and approve batches of receipts on
a mobile device. The Receipt Batch Approvals mobile applications give you the ability to:
- Review all receipt batches that have a pending status.
- Review receipts in a batch.
- Review line-level information for a receipt.
- Approve a receipt batch.
- Review text attachments and photos associated with each receipt.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications enable the mobile workforce to
accelerate business execution on their device of choice.

General Ledger: GL Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

GL Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


You use the G/L Batch Approvals mobile applications to review and approve batches of journal entries
on a mobile device. The G/L Batch Approvals mobile applications give you the ability to:
- Review all journal entry batches that are in pending status.
- Review documents in a batch.
- Review line-level information for a document.
- Approve a journal entry batch.
- Review text attachments and photos associated with each journal entry line.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Ledger system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications enable the mobile workforce to
accelerate business execution on their device of choice.

Accounts Receivable: Invoice Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Invoice Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


You use the Invoice Batch Approvals mobile applications to review and approve batches of invoices on
a mobile device. The Invoice Batch Approvals mobile applications give you the ability to:
- Review all invoice batches that have a pending status.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 69 of 202
- Review invoices in a batch.
- Review line-level information for an invoice.
- Approve an invoice batch.
- Review text attachments and photos associated with each invoice.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications enable the mobile workforce to
accelerate business execution on their device of choice.

Accounts Payable: Voucher Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Voucher Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 01-Jul-2015]


You use the Voucher Batch Approvals mobile applications to review and approve batches of vouchers
on a mobile device. The Voucher Batch Approvals mobile applications give you the ability to:
- Review all voucher batches that are in pending status.
- Review vouchers in a batch.
- Review line-level information for a voucher.
- Approve a voucher batch.
- Review text attachments and photos associated with each voucher line.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications enable the mobile workforce to
accelerate business execution on their device of choice.

Capital Asset Management: Equipment Work Order Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and
Tablet

Equipment Work Order Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]
Use the Equipment Work Order Time Entry mobile smartphone and tablet applications to enter, search,
edit, and delete equipment timecards. The smartphone and tablet applications enables you to enter time
against a piece of equipment, and also update and review each timecard's work date, employee hours,
work order number, pay type, operation sequence, equipment worked and hours. You can use the filters
or history to search for equipment timecards.

These applications leverage functionality from the Capital Asset Management module.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Sales Order Management: Sales Order Counts Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 70 of 202
Sales Order Counts Mobile Enterprise Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 13-Aug-2015]
You use the Sales Order Counts enterprise mobile applications to inquire on the orders associated with
a specific branch/plant in your organization. The intended user of these applications is a branch or
warehouse manager who needs to determine what orders are awaiting fulfillment at their branch, plant,
or location. The application can be used by any authorized personnel with a need to review order counts
and information.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Using these applications, you can select the different tabs to view order information by status,
hold code, promised ship date, or item number. These applications enable warehouse managers and
personnel to use a mobile device to review, plan, and prepare for the orders that are currently awaiting
fulfillment at their location.
Examples: A warehouse manager can log into the Sales Order Counts mobile application each day to
review the details of the orders currently awaiting fulfillment. The manager can use this information to
plan warehouse personnel and functions accordingly.
User Experience: The Sales Order Counts mobile applications provide users with a simplified, mobile
view of the orders currently awaiting fulfillment in a specified location. Users can view order counts by
order status, order hold code, promised ship date, and item number.

Expense Management: Expense Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Expense Entry Mobile Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 28-Jul-2016]
You use the Expense Entry mobile enterprise tablet and smartphone applications to enable employees
in your organization to enter, review, edit, and submit expense reports on a mobile device when they are
away from the office. Managers can also use these applications to review the expense reports of their
employees.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The Expense Entry mobile applications give users the ability to:
* Enter new expense reports. When entering new expense reports, you can:
- Enter summary receipt expenses.
- Enter split receipts by job cost, business unit, or work order.
- Add corporate credit card transactions to the report.
- Perform credit card matching and capture summary receipts.
- Attach photos of receipts or other documents to a report.
* Edit their own expense reports that are currently at an editable status.
* Search for and review their own expense reports.
* Managers can review the expense reports of their direct report employees.
Examples: Employees who must enter expense reports for work-related expenses can use a mobile
tablet or smartphone to enter, review, and submit those expenses for management review and approval.
User Experience: You use the Expense Entry mobile enterprise tablet and smartphone applications to
enable employees in your organization to enter, review, edit, and submit expense reports on a mobile
device when they are away from the office. Managers can also use these applications to review the
expense reports of their employees.

Sales Order Management: Sales Order Entry Mobile Tablet

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 71 of 202
Order Entry Application for Tablet [10 : 15-Nov-2016]
Customers can cost-effectively implement a front-end order entry application on a mobile tablet using
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Order Management functionality. This type of mobile application enables companies to tap into new
sales channels and create a competitive advantage.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Using the Order Entry mobile tablet application, users can:
- Locate items via product catalog.
- View item details such as pictures, description, quantity available, and base price.
- Scan items into the order.
- Add to an order.
- View order details and subtotals.
- Update item quantity, cancel an item, and override unit price.
- Enter customer information at checkout.
- Select payment method to complete order.
Examples: Customers often have business units where counter sales are performed. These customers
can use the Order Entry mobile tablet application to
sell products to their customers using a simple, intuitive, user interface.
User Experience: Using the Order Entry mobile tablet application, users can:
- Locate items via product catalog.
- View item details such as pictures, description, quantity available, and base price.
- Scan items into an order.
- Add to an order.
- View order details and subtotals.
- Update item quantity, cancel an item, and override unit price.
- Enter customer information at checkout.
- Select payment method to complete order.

Credit Card Processing Using the Order Entry Mobile Tablet [20 : 15-Nov-2016]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Order Entry mobile tablet application enables your sales force to create
sales orders while on the go, whether on the sales floor or in the field.

Also, the Order Entry tablet can interface with a third-party credit card peripheral of choice to enable
credit card processing on the device at the point of sale. You need the Oracle Mobile Application
Framework and Mobile Application Archive files to modify and extend the Sales Order Entry application
to perform credit card processing.

When you use the Order Entry tablet to create a sales order, the information is immediately passed to
the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system for further processing and ultimately shipping the product to your
customer.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2015)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Field sales teams can increase their sales revenue by minimizing the time required to
complete the field sales order process. By engaging customers and meeting their demands in lesser

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 72 of 202
time, the field sales teams also increase their productivity.

Condition-Based Maintenance: Condition Based Maintenance Mobile Smartphone and


Tablet

Condition-Based Maintenance Mobile Enterprise Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 :
18-Apr-2015]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Condition-Based Maintenance Alert Mobile Smartphone and Tablet
applications enable users to review condition-based alert messages, and to manually update alerts with
information, such as equipment number, measurement location, alert level, alert status, notification
recipient, notification structure type, model work order, model service type, and assigned work order
details. The applications also enable users to add condition-based alerts. In addition, the applications
provide users the ability to review and delete existing photos, and to also add photos for alerts.
These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Condition-Based
Maintenance system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Condition-Based Maintenance Alert Mobile Smartphone and
Tablet applications enable you to select the different tabs to review alert information, such as alert
details, response details, and to view and save photos for alerts. These applications enable you to use a
mobile device to review, enter or update open alerts.

Sales Order Management: Sales Held Order Release Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Sales Held Order Release Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 18-Apr-2015]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Held Order Release Mobile Smartphone and Tablet applications
enable users to inquire on the sales orders on hold, review details of held orders, and release the orders
from hold as a whole or at the line level. The applications can be used by any authorized personnel who
needs to review sales held orders and related information, and to release held orders.

These applications leverage functionality from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Order Management
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Held Order Release Mobile Smartphone and Tablet
applications enable authorized personnel to use a mobile device to review and release the sales held
orders.

Sales Order Management: Quote Review and Release Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Quote Review and Release Mobile Enterprise Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 18-
Apr-2015]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Quote Review and Release mobile applications enable you to review quotes
and convert to a sales order.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 73 of 202
Sales Order Management: Search Sales Order Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Search Sales Order Mobile Enterprise Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 15-Nov-2016]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Search Sales Order mobile applications enable you to search and review
sales order information.

You can scan barcodes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan barcodes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions makes
mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Inventory Management:Product Price and Availability Smartphone and Tablet

Product Price and Availability Mobile Enterprise Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 28-
Jul-2016]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Product Price and Availability mobile applications enable you to review price
and availability information for an item.

You can scan bar codes from the device itself or with a third-party scanning device.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to scan bar codes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions
makes mobile devices a way to improve business efficiencies and maintain data integrity.

Accounts Payable: Payment Batch Approvals Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Payment Batch Approvals Mobile Applications for Tablet and Smartphone [10 : 18-Apr-2015]
You use the Payment Batch Approvals mobile applications to review and approve batches of payments
on a mobile device. The Payment Batch Approvals mobile applications give you the ability to:
- Review all payment batches that are in pending status.
- Review payments and their vouchers in a batch.
- Review line-level information for a payment in a batch.
- Approve a payment batch.
- Review text attachments and photos associated with each payment in a batch.

These applications leverage functionality from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable
system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Enterprise Applications enable the mobile workforce to
accelerate business execution on their device of choice.

Time and Labor: Project Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 74 of 202
Project Time Entry Mobile Smartphone and Tablet [10 : 12-May-2015]
The Project Time Entry mobile smartphone and tablet applicatiosn enable employees at the job site to
enter timecards for project and non-project time.

These applications leverage functionality of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Human Resources system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Using the Project Time Entry smartphone and tablet application, employees can:
- Display a list of account numbers for a project, and select an account number for the timecard.
- Enter, review, and submit timecards for project time.
- Enter, review, and submit timecards for non-project time.

Mobile Applications

Mobile Bar Code Camera Scanning and Device Scanning [10 : 21-Jun-2018]
Modern mobile devices, such as smartphones and tablets, are being adopted within enterprises to
facilitate supply chain transactions and access information.

The ability to scan barcodes to facilitate inquiries and create supply chain transactions enable you to
enhance business efficiency and maintain data integrity.

This capability is available in these mobile applications: Order Entry tablet (M42010), Product Price and
Availability tablet (M41062), Product Price and Availability smartphone (M41063), Search Sales Orders
tablet (M42060), Search Sales Order smartphone (M42061), Warehouse Availability tablet (M46231),
Create Work Order tablet (M177142), Create Service Order tablet (M177141), Manage My Work Orders
tablet (M17020), Manage My Work Orders smartphone (M17010), Inventory Availability smartphone
(M41207), Inventory Availability tablet (M41205), Manage Customer Equipment tablet (M17060),
Manage Customer Equipment smartphone (M17061), Manage Equipment tablet (M13040), Manage
Equipment smartphone (M13041), Quick Case Entry smartphone (M17500E), Service Work Order Time
Entry tablet (M3112211), Service Work Order Time Entry smartphone (M3112212), Equipment Work
Order Time Entry tablet (M0511211), Equipment Work Order Time Entry smartphone (M0511212),
Conditioned Based Maintenance Alert tablet (M13101), Conditioned Based Maintenance Alert
smartphone (M13102), Manage My Cases smartphone (M17510E), Field Progress Entry tablet
(M51050), Field Progress Entry smartphone (M51052), Project Time Entry tablet (M51047), and Project
Time Entry smartphone (M51048).
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: This feature is also available for release 9.1.

Location Services [20 : 01-Feb-2017]


JD Edwards now supports the ability to use location as filter criteria within a search. This capability
which leverages location services allow users to understand their proximity to one or more things. For
example, a sales representative can find all the customers within x miles of his current location and then
display the results within a map.

This capability is available in these mobile applications: Mobile Contact Customer Tablet (M030010),
Mobile Contact Customer Smartphone (M03015), Manage Customer Equipment Tablet (M17060), and
Manage Customer Equipment Smartphone (M17061).

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 75 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Human Resources: Employee Time Entry Mobile Tablet

Employee Time Entry Mobile Tablet [10 : 16-Oct-2017]


Mobile Employee Time Entry provides an intuitive, easy-to-use mobile application for employees to
enter, update, and submit time entry from wherever they are, making time tracking convenient and
efficient. Employees can easily enter time from their mobile devices when traveling or otherwise away
from the office.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Inventory Management: Cycle Count Mobile Tablet

Cycle Count Mobile Tablet [10 : 16-Oct-2017]


The supply chain mobile application improves the accuracy of supply chain transactions, increases labor
productivity, and reduces data entry and manual errors while streamlining the process. The following
new mobile application will support the Process Simplification for Production Execution: Cycle Count -
for material handlers who have been assigned a list of items to physically count within the warehouse.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Inventory Management: Inventory Transfer Mobile Tablet

Inventory Transfer Mobile Tablet [10 : 16-Oct-2017]


The supply chain mobile application improves the accuracy of supply chain transactions, increases labor
productivity, and reduces data entry and manual errors while streamlining the process. The following
new mobile application will support the Process Simplification for Production Execution: Inventory
Transfers - for material handlers who are moving items from one location to another.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Not Applicable

Learning Path for Mobile Application: Purchase Order Approval [10 : 20-Oct-2020]
Oracle's JD Edwards mobile strategy promotes customer choice of a low-code no-code development
tool capable of making REST calls and using orchestrations that enable customers to develop their own
mobile applications.
A learning path and other collateral are provided to show how customers can use Oracle's Visual Builder
Cloud Service (VBCS) to develop an example of a Purchase Order Approval mobile application. This
feature is for demonstration purposes only and is meant to show the art of the possible while providing
developers ideas on how to leverage the JD Edwards toolset and other Oracle technologies to support
their mobile application needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 76 of 202
Status: Available Type: Technology Industry:

Learning Path for Mobile Application: Customer Search [20 : 04-Nov-2020]


Oracle's JD Edwards mobile strategy promotes customer choice of a low-code no-code development
tool capable of making REST calls and using orchestrations that enable customers to develop their own
mobile applications.
A learning path and other collateral are provided to show how customers can use Oracle's Visual Builder
Cloud Service (VBCS) to develop an example of a Customer Search mobile application. This feature is
for demonstration purposes only and is meant to show the art of the possible while providing developers
ideas on how to leverage the JD Edwards toolset and other Oracle technologies to support their mobile
application needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)
Status: Available Type: Technology Industry:

Learning Path for Mobile Application: Inventory Availability [30 : 11-Aug-2020]


Oracle's JD Edwards mobile strategy promotes customer choice of a low-code no-code development
tool capable of making REST calls and using orchestrations that enable customers to develop their own
mobile applications.
A learning path and other collateral are provided to show how customers can use Oracle's Visual Builder
Cloud Service (VBCS) to develop an example of an Inventory Availability mobile application. This
feature is for demonstration purposes only and is meant to show the art of the possible while providing
developers ideas on how to leverage the JD Edwards toolset and other Oracle technologies to support
their mobile application needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Technology Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 77 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

In-Memory Applications
In-Memory Planning Advisor

In-Memory Plannng Advisor [200 : 18-Apr-2015]


The In-Memory Planning Advisor provides material planners an interactive, head's up view of their
Supply & Demand data. It provides the ability to review their current planning model in order to react
quickly to changes in their supply.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Allows planners to modify supply & demand to see real time effects on the Supply Chain.

In-Memory Planning Advisor [210 : 18-Apr-2015]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne In-Memory Planning Advisor leverages the Oracle Engineered Systems
technology of faster database access to read through requirements planning, inventory, sales,
manufacturing, and procurement data in real-time. Based on this data, the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
In-Memory Planning Advisor creates comprehensive, visual, and interactive displays of planned and
actual supply-and-demand details, enabling efficient replenishment planning and execution.
Features include:
- Graphical summary of messages generated by requirements planning (MRP/MPS/DRP) based on
user-defined thresholds and priorities
- Item summary of current inventory condition with graphical on-hand and days of supply alerts
- Lead time alerts
- Single, comprehensive, interactive, real-time presentation of actual and planned supply and demand
data
- Toggle between adjusted (planned) and unadjusted (actual) views
- User-friendly supporting graphics
- Visibility to effects of supply changes (prior to saving or implementing plan)
- Restoration of the plan to its original state with a single click (prior to saving or implementing the plan)
- Ability to freeze (or unfreeze) individual or multiple orders easily
- Alerts for critical component days of supply and ending available
- Visibility to inventory available in other branches
- Ability to create or view text or media object attachments
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: - Efficient inventory planning/scheduling

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 78 of 202
- Faster response to supply/demand changes
- Improved planner/buyer productivity
- Reduced component shortages
- Reduced freight costs
- Improved customer service
- Improved communication

In-Memory Project Portfolio Advisor

In-Memory Project Portfolio Management [10 : 11-May-2023]


- Real time executive assessment of financial status of project portfolio including budgets, actuals,
forecasts and billing
- Insight to current and cash flow for individual projects across project portfolio
- Single management source for complex projects
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Engineering and Construction
Benefits: - Reduce time reviewing detailed and roll up views on project portfolio
- Decrease time for monthly financial close for entire project porfolio
- Increase project profits by eliminating waste

In-Memory Project Portfolio Management [20 : 11-May-2023]


Additional features added to the In-Memory Project Portfolio Management solution:

- User-defined formulas in column definitions for both project financial and billing amounts
- Visual alerts
- Filtering by cost code/cost type
- As if Currency/Dates
- Support for viewing un-posted and date-based selected transactions charged to projects
- Column definition hover
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Engineering and Construction
Benefits: - Reduce time to analyze project financial information with user-defined formulas
- Give project managers the ability to quickly identify amounts that are out of tolerance though the use of
visual alerts
- Ability to view a set of multi-currency projects in one single currency
- Provide project managers with the ability to view posted and un-posted transactions to a project
- Provide additional flexibility in what project managers view and summarize project information through
the use of filtering by cost code/cost type
- Give project managers quick access to validate how calculations and other column definitions are
defined through the use of hover forms

In-Memory Sales Advisor

In-Memory Sales Advisor [10 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne In-Memory Sales Advisor solution for Oracle Engineered Systems
combines the hardware of Oracle with the application layers of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne providing
unprecedented speed to gather, aggregate, and summarize real-time customer, product, and sales

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 79 of 202
information. This compelling solution sits on top of existing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Order
Management and Advanced Pricing information to enables customer service representatives and
executives to increase revenue and profit margins while not interrupting their existing processes.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: - Drive sales revenue by recommending increased purchase quantities in real-time.
- Reduce system setup and maintenance by enabling the system to dynamically evaluate quantity level
breaks for all discounts.
- Monitor item, order, and customer profit margins to ensure margins are met during order capture.
- Enable the real-time processing of millions of historical and current sales order records.

In-Memory Sales Advisor [20 : 11-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne In-Memory Sales Advisor solution combines the power of Oracle
hardware with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications. This solution leverages existing JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Sales Order Management, Advanced Pricing, Inventory Management, and Fulfillment
Management information to enable customer service representatives and executives to increase
revenue and profit margins while not interrupting their existing processes.

Additional features added to the In-Memory Sales Advisor solution.


- Cross-sell products in real-time based on past sales history.
- Run revenue and profit simulations interactively using changing sales variables (cost, price, forecast).
- Up-sell in real-time based on total order information (amounts and weights).
- View supply information dynamically during order capture.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: - Drive sales revenue by suggesting additional related products to purchase in real-time.
- Reduce system setup and maintenance by enabling the system to dynamically evaluate order and
basket discounts for up-sell opportunities.
- Generate higher customer satisfaction with real-time insight into product availability and priority ranking
of sales orders to proactively communicate the probability of fulfillment of an item.
- Improve revenue and profit visibility using "what-if" simulations over large amounts of data to enable
more informed decision making when market conditions (such as cost, price, and forecast) change.
- Enable the real-time processing of millions of historical and current sales order records.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 80 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Asset Lifecycle Management


Capital Asset Management

Work Order Mass Update [150 : 11-May-2023]


Work Order Mass Update addresses a common need across four JD Edwards EnterpriseOne modules:

- Manufacturing Management
- Capital Asset Management
- Service Management
- Real Estate Management

Within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne a work order is the transactional record used to initiate, track and
report work activities. Work orders ensure orderly and visible progress, and cost of activities required to
execute business tasks. There are typically hundreds and sometimes thousands of work orders existing
in the system. Work order mass update is a utility designed to dramatically decrease the amount of time
spent managing work orders while increasing the timeliness and overall accuracy of work order
information.

A workbench permits selection and updating en masse of each work order type. The key features of this
workbench include:

- Centralized location for all work order mass update management

- Powerful search features for finding the specific subset of work orders to be updated. Users can build
search criteria by combining dozens of fields in order to find the perfect subset of work orders to be
updated. Additionally users can save search criteria for reuse saving additional time and improving
accuracy in selecting the correct set of records

- Once records have been retrieved users can review them and make any needed record
inclusion/exclusion adjustments before proceeding with the update process

- Execute mass update in proof and final mode(s)

- Audit reports are available for both proof and final update processes

Design based on:

- Intuitive access to utility from associated work order applications


- Ease of use (minimized key strokes intuitive action prompts and safeguards to prevent errors)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 81 of 202
- Robust search capability
- Administrative control
- Limit risk
- System performance during the execution of mass updates to large numbers of records
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - Reduce amount of time required to update records
- Improve overall accuracy of work orders
- Increase end user satisfaction and reduce frustration
Examples: Close a batch of completed work orders. Use work order mass update to select the batch of
completed work orders and update status to closed in one batch.
Notes: Supports these modules employing work orders:

- Apparel Management
- Capital Asset Management
- Service Management
- Manufacturing Management
- Real Estate Management module

Display Latitude and Longitude on the Equipment Master [241 : 11-May-2023]


The Latitude and Longitude fields for the current location are displayed on the Equipment Master P1701
and P1702 forms.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Having latitude and longitude on forms makes them available for use with JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Cafe One so that a map of the current equipment location can be seen.

Mobile Apps for Capital Asset Management [242 : 11-May-2023]


A series of mobile applications has been developed and is available for both iOS and Android
smartphones and tablets. These applications as they related to Capital Asset Management support
functionality for:
Work Orders
Equipment
Meter Readings
Work Order Time Entry

These applications are role-based, that is, they were developed with a certain role in mind, such as a
maintenance technician or a maintenance supervisor. Each of these apps are individually listed in this
catalog under Mobile Enterprise Applications, but as they relate to CAM, there are listed here:

Capital Asset Management: Create Work Order Tablet


Capital Asset Management: Equipment Work Order Time Entry Smartphone
Capital Asset Management: Equipment Work Order Time Entry Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Manage Equipment Smartphone
Capital Asset Management: Manage Equipment Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Manage My Work Orders Smartphone
Capital Asset Management: Manage My Work Orders Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Review Team Work Orders Smartphone
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 82 of 202
Capital Asset Management: Review Team Work Orders Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Template Meter Reading Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Manage Equipment Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Manage Equipment Smartphone
Capital Asset Management: Manage My Work Orders Tablet
Capital Asset Management: Manage My Work Orders Smartphone
Capital Asset Management: Template Meter Reading Tablet
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Orchestrations [262 : 21-Jun-2018]


JD Edwards is delivering pre-built orchestrations for select applications to address common use cases.
These orchestrations can be used as models to design custom orchestrations:

- Add CBM Alert: Processes condition-based maintenance alerts for an asset

- Update Meter Readings: Updates equipment meter readings

- Update Equipment Location: Updates equipment's geopositioning data

- Kanban Check In/Check Out: Processes kanban check-in and check-out transactions

- Add Blend Operation: Creates blend operations

JD Edwards EnterprisOne orchestrations eliminate error-prone and time-consuming manual data entry
and reduce the cost of integrating data collected from machines or devices to enterprise applications.

Benefits of orchestrations to the enterprise include accurate real-time data, advanced and accurate
analytics, and optimized business processes.

Change: Added in Release 9.2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Capital Asset Management [272 : 25-Apr-2017]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design
philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that provides the information you need to know at a glance with
alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway directly into the applications you need to use, when you
need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Capital Asset Management:
- Asset Manager
- Maintenance Manager
- Mainenance Scheduler
- Maintenance Supervisor
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 83 of 202
- Maintenance Technician
- Operations Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Preconfigured Notifications for Capital Asset Management [292 : 08-Mar-2022]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Capital Asset Management. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Capital Asset Management Usability Improvements [302 : 23-Mar-2018]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne now provides simplified CAM Work Order Entry and Planning Workbench
applications by delivering personalized forms. These personalized forms limit the number of tabs and
fields in the header area of the form and enable more data to be viewed in the grid.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Usability of the applications is improved through simplification of the forms. With the use of
Advanced Query, the large number of filter fields in the header of the form are no longer necessary.

Preventive Maintence Schedule Copy Usability [312 : 08-Mar-2022]


Preventive maintenance schedules are often the same for similar equipment. A simplified means of
copying a Preventive Maintenance Schedule from one piece of equipment to another is now available.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 84 of 202
Benefits: This new functionality makes it easier for asset and maintenance managers to update
Preventive Maintenance Schedules for their equipment.

PM Schedule - Routes and Associations Visibility [322 : 26-Jun-2018]


When working with Preventive Maintenance Schedules and Backlog items, it is important to know if they
have routes or associations in order to plan and execute Preventive Maintenance with the utmost
efficiency. Both the PM Schedules (P1207) and PM Backlog (P12071) applications are enhanced to
provide visual indicators to show if routes and/or associations exist for the item. CafeOne layouts have
also been provided to view these routes and associations easily. These indicators and layouts enable
you to view this information without having to navigate to other applications, improving the application's
usability.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

P48201 - Simplified Work Order Detail Copy and Labor Parts Visibility [332 : 26-Jun-2018]
The ability to copy an existing work order is a fundamental requirement for equipment maintenance
activities. Previously, the ability to view the source work orders parts list or labor detail was not available
when copying a work order. This enhancement provides you the ability to view this information prior to
copying the work order. This enables you to know that you are copying the most applicable work order
including the parts and labor.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Additional Preconfigured Notifications for Capital Asset Management [342 : 08-Mar-2022]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered additional notification content for Capital Asset Management.
Your users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can
personalize them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your
specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Remove IGS from Release 9.2 [352 : 13-Aug-2019]


The Intelligent Graphic Solution (IGS) feature has been deprecated as part of bugs 21198035,
21198026, and 21198043.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of August 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Warn User When an Obsolete Item is Being Added to a Work Order [362 : 20-Oct-2020]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management and Service Management systems have
been enhanced to generate a warning when a user tries to add an obsolete part number to equipment or
a service work order. Two conditions are checked to determine if an inventory item is obsolete or not:
Stocking Type is "O" (Obsolete) or "U" (Obsolete – Use up), and Line Type is not "T" (Text Line). The
work order applications that have been updated to provide this validation are P13714, P17714, and
P90CD002.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 85 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Prevent Creation of Service Orders and Contracts When Equipment Is Inactive [372 : 19-Nov-
2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Service Management system has been enhanced to not allow the user
to create service work orders or service contracts when the associated equipment has been marked
inactive. The Allow Work Order flag on the equipment master has been modified to Allow Work Order
and Contracts. The Service Contracts application will now validate that the equipment is active by
checking this flag before allowing the user to create a service contract.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Automate Crediting a Service Order to Reduce Errors [382 : 20-Oct-2020]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management and Service Management systems have
been enhanced to make it easier to credit a work order, similar to how it is handled for a sales order. A
processing option has been added to all the three Parts applications (P17730, P90CD015, and P13730)
allowing the user to choose to default 'C' as the line type in Parts details. When the option 'Reverse
Sign' is activated in Line Type Constants, the quantity changes to negative automatically when the user
exits the Parts detail line.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Simplified Steps to Add Work Orders from Equipment Master [392 : 20-Oct-2020]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Capital Asset Management now provides row exits in the Work with
Equipment Master program to access the Service Work Order Self Service Entry Form and the
Equipment Work Order Entry Form to create work orders. These row exits pass the Equipment Number
to the appropriate work order program eliminating several clicks.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Preventive Maintenance - Additional Columns for Grid filtering [402 : 20-Jul-2021]


To simplify user processes, columns are added to the grids of several preventive maintenance programs
to enhance filtering capabilities.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Optimized Maintenance Work Order Display [502 : 11-Apr-2023]


In addition to general performance improvements, maintenance work order management applications
have been enhanced to allow system administrators to set a limit on the number of work orders to
initially display when child assets are included in an inquiry. This eliminates potential display problems
with large numbers of child assets due to database restrictions.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 86 of 202
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: • Optimized performance by providing the ability to set the work order limit based on user
preferences and view the required number of records from the extensive list
• Simplified display of work orders by providing the ability to view the records based on either work
orders or equipment
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Condition-Based Maintenance

Preconfigured Notifications for Condition-Based Maintenance [40 : 10-Apr-2018]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Condition-Based Maintenance. Your
users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize
them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific
business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Resource Assignments

Interactive Staff Utilization for Service and Asset Maintenance [40 : 09-Mar-2022]
The updated Staff Utilization program provides a graphical calendar view of scheduled work orders by
Supervisor, Crew, Craft, or Technician. The remaining available capacity is displayed in an intuitive
graphical format for each workday in real-time. A maintenance scheduler can select the time period to
be displayed, analyze load and capacity and easily make appropriate changes using drag and drop
resulting in optimized utilization and reduced effort in scheduling.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Usability Enhancements for Resource Assignments [60 : 06-Dec-2023]


Applications used during the resource and crew assignment processes are enhanced to improve the
user experience, automate the work scheduling process, and increase overall productivity.

•Improved search capabilities with the addition of new filter options, that enable a more comprehensive
and targeted search for information.
•Simplified crew scheduling process through customization of tables, sequencing data, and adding extra
columns to meet specific requirements, resulting in a more tailored and efficient scheduling system.
•Ability to assign multiple work orders to resources at the same time by using the JD Edwards import
capability, thereby saving time and resources.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 87 of 202
•Automatic update of assignment details when a work order is canceled and reassigned, ensuring that
resources are not assigned to unwanted work order and are utilized effectively.
•There is an option to update the start date of the work order when the work order is rescheduled. With
this enhancement, resource managers no longer need to manually update the start date of the work
order, resulting in significant time and effort savings.

Change: Added in Release 24


Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Advanced Real Estate Forecasting

Flexibility for Accounts Used in Advanced Real Estate Forecasting Budget Calculation [100 : 23-
Jun-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Advanced Real Estate Forecasting system has been enhanced to
provide flexibility in the sources of account information included in the budget calculation process.
Account information from other buildings, as defined in the expense participation process, may now be
included in the budget calculation for a building. Budget managers can now create more accurate
budgets using all pertinent account information that affects each building's budget.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Advanced Real Estate Forecasting (AREF) Enhancements [60 : 11-May-2023]


This set of enhancements continues to deepen robust budgeting and forecasting capabilities in
Advanced Real Estate Forecasting driven from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Real Estate user group.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Summary Industry: Real Estate

Enhanced AREF Gross Up Process [70 : 11-May-2023]


Enhance the gross up process to ensure that an expense is shared by all participating tenants. Included
in this enhancement is the ability to have an audit trail over how the gross up amounts were calculated.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: - Accurate accounting of shared expenses
- Improved budgeting and forecasting of shared expenses

Spread of Expenses [80 : 11-May-2023]


When forecasting revenue and shared expenses instead of spreading shared expenses evenly over a
year provide the ability to spread monthly shared expenses so that rent collection and expense recovery
are closely matched to the period in which they actually occur.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Planned Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: - Improved cash flow forecasting by matching expected expenses in the month they actually
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 88 of 202
occur
- Reduces risk of uncollected expenses in the event a lease is broken
Examples: A real estate management company might spend 50 percent of the building budget in the
first three months of the year due to snow removal. Rather than forecast the recovery of 1/12th of the
annual expense for each month project recovery to match aggregate expenditures at end of each
period.

Include Fixed Asset Costs in AREF Budgets [90 : 11-May-2023]


Provide a method for forecasting depreciation and amortization for in place assets (fixed assets),
building capital expenditures, and new leasing costs in the AREF budget process.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Planned Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: - Minimize number of clicks to look for property attributes
- Allow property managers to view all units with specified attributes, thus allowing property managers to
have a better view of their property portfolio
- Shorten the sales cycle as property managers can quickly find units based on a prospect's property
requirements

Real Estate Management

Attribute Search [290 : 11-May-2023]


Enhance Real Estate Management to give property managers the ability to search on unit, floor and
building attributes across their portfolio of properties.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: - Minimize number of clicks to look for property attributes
- Allow property managers to view all units with specified attributes, thus allowing property managers to
have a better view of their property portfolio
- Shorten the sales cycle as property managers can quickly find units based on a prospect's property
requirements

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Real Estate Management [340 : 23-Jun-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides role-based solutions for Real
Estate Management:
- Lease Administrator
- Lessee Accounting Manager
- Property Manager

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 89 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Revenue Recognition for Real Estate Management [350 : 23-Jun-2021]


With the inception of FASB ASC 842 and IASB IFRS 16 Leases, lessees and lessors will be required to
recognize leases greater than 12 months in length on their balance sheets. This standard refers to both
property and non-property leases. The new standard provides investors and creditors with more
transparency. Public companies will be required to follow this standard beginning in fiscal years starting
after December 15, 2018, while non-public companies are not required to follow until 2020. This
standard also includes the adoption of the new revenue recognition standard for lease management
companies.

Revenue recognition for Real Estate Management will provide accurate lessor and lessee accounting for
property and non-property leases. This enhancement will use existing Revenue Recognition features, as
well as additional updates to the Real Estate Management and Accounts Receivable systems to meet
the requirements. This standard includes the adoption of the revenue recognition accounting standards
for lease vendor industries.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: This feature enables customers who use the Real Estate Management system for leasing to
follow the revenue recognition requirements within the standards, as identified by FASB ASC 842 and
IASB IFRS 16 Leases.
Examples: This new feature will provide Real Estate Management users with the ability to recognize
revenue associated with leases over time, based on a defined schedule.

For example, a tenant is billed 6-months in advance for 6 months of concierge services, and the invoice
total is $45,000 USD. The lessor, using this new feature, will have the ability to recognize revenue
automatically at a rate of $7,500 USD per month, for 6 months.
User Experience: This new feature will follow the design standards currently in place for Revenue
Recognition, enabling those that are already familiar with revenue recognition accounting to easily
understand and use this new feature.

Importing Lease Data Into the Real Estate Management System [390 : 23-Jun-2021]
Several programs are now available to facilitate the import of real estate management data into the
EnterpriseOne system. These programs use the standard EDI process, which involves creating flat files
that are formatted using the same layout as their associated Z tables, and populating those flat files with
your business data. Once the flat files are populated, you run inbound flat file conversion programs to
populate the Z tables. You can then edit the data in the Z table, and run the inbound processors to
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 90 of 202
populate the EnterpriseOne tables.

Data import functionality is available for these types of data:


* Lease header
* Lease detail
* Unit master
* Bill codes
* Area master
* Recurring billing
* Manual billing
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Real Estate
Benefits: This feature enables users who are new to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Real Estate
Management system to easily upload data for multiple leases. This feature also enables existing users
to upload data for leases acquired in the event of a merger or acquisition, or to upload leases that were
managed in the Accounts Payable system (lessee leases) into the Real Estate Management system so
that they can be managed by balance sheet lessee accounting processes.

Void Invoice Lines for Prepaid Rent [450 : 23-Jun-2021]


When matching an invoice to a receipt via Real Estate Standard Receipts Entry (P15103), you can void
specific invoice billing lines, even for those billing lines that have been billed and paid in advance, such
as prepaid rent.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of June 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Property managers can minimize the time related to receipt matching and optimize their cash
flow by only voiding the billing lines during the receipt process that do not match the cash received. This
provides a more accurate matching at time of receipt, thus eliminating the time to research and resolve
any unapplied receipts at a later date.

Preconfigured Notifications for Real Estate Management [460 : 23-Jun-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Real Estate Management. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Unit Master Revisions Simplified User Experience [470 : 23-Jun-2021]


The Unit Master Revisions form has been simplified by the inclusion of the associated descriptions for
Unit Status, Expense Participation Unit Type, State, and Country. The revised form makes it easier for
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 91 of 202
property managers to understand unit attributes.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Lease Global Update to Include Document Key Company for All Tables [480 : 23-Jun-2021]
The Lease Global Update program (R15117) now updates all the document key company fields in all the
tables updated by the process. The update is applicable for tables included in Accounts Receivable,
Accounts Payable, and Real Estate programs. This enhancement ensures that all the downstream
processes use the appropriate company for processing.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)


Status: Available Type: Industry: Real Estate

Flexibility to Run Sales Overage Generation in Proof Mode [490 : 23-Jun-2021]


The Sales Overage Generation program (R15120) has been enhanced to add the flexibility of executing
the program in proof mode. This enhancement enables
real estate accountants to review the results of the process prior to them being finalized, improving the
accuracy of all the entries.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Real Estate

Attachment Consistency for Leases [500 : 23-Jun-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Real Estate Management system has been enhanced to provide more
consistent access to attachments for various types of lease data as well as to provide the ability to print
them on additional reports. Attachments can now be accessed and managed from Lease Master
Revisions (P1501), Work with Sales Information (P15013), and Work with Security Deposits (P1565)
programs. Attachments will also now be available to print on the Sales Overage Listing (R154014) and
the Security Deposit Critical Date Report (R15614). These changes allow lease administrators more
places to manage and view attachments.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Straight-Line Rent (FASB13) by Fiscal Date Pattern [510 : 23-Jun-2021]


Real estate accountants can now process straight-line rent based on the company's fiscal date pattern.
Previously, straight-line rent was processed based solely on calendar year and month. Processing
straight-line rent by the company's fiscal date pattern more accurately associates rent revenue to the
company's fiscal year and period in which it is earned or realized.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

New and Improved Property Location Map [520 : 09-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 92 of 202
Property managers and rental specialists can now take advantage of the new Property Location Map
JET program that provides an intuitive interface with an improved UI and visibility of property locations.
These personnel can easily locate the properties on a map and view their rentable and usable spaces of
the properties. They can also have easy access to common actions related to the properties. These
capabilities enable them to effortlessly manage their property portfolio.

Note: To download the Electronic Software Updates (ESUs) pertaining to this feature, click Download
Feature and see the dependency.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2022

Ability to Exclude Leases from Log Detail Report [530 : 09-May-2023]


The Log Detail Listing report (R15402) has been updated with a new processing option using which
rental managers can specify up to five lease statuses that they want to exclude from the report such as
Terminated, Inactive, or Expired. This enhancement improves efficiency for rental managers when
reviewing the report.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Lease Name in the Log Detail Report [540 : 09-May-2023]


The Log Detail Listing report (R15402) has been updated to include the lease name with the lease
number to increase efficiency for real estate managers. This improvement eliminates the need to
constantly look up the lease name.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Support for Reporting Current vs Non-Current Portions of Lessee Lease Balances [550 : 09-May-
2023]
JD Edwards introduces a new lease accounting report to help companies comply with the FASB 842
requirement to classify right-of-use assets and lease liabilities as current and noncurrent in classified
statements of financial position. This new report can optionally create a reclassification journal entry.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Improved Amortization Schedule Calculations for Leases Paid in Advance [560 : 09-May-2023]
Amortization schedules for non-property leases with payment method set to In Advance are created to
reflect the correct accounting process. For each period, the system deducts the payment from the
beginning balance, then calculates interest on the remaining balance. In the last period, the payment
made on the first day equals the beginning balance, so after deducting the payment, there is no
remaining balance on which to calculate interest. Thus, the last period will not show an interest amount
for a lease with payments made in advance.
Change: Added in Release 22

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 93 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Rental Management

Overview [10 : 15-Nov-2021]


Rental Management enables customers to manage the rental of capital equipment, inventory items, and
selling of associated services and products.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Rental Management enables customers to:
1) Manage rental contracts and agreements
2) Manage the rental process
3) Perform equipment commitments to inventory
4) Periodic and final billing
5) Manage rental cost allocations
6) Rental management analytics including profitability
7) Rent capitalize and un-capitalize goods
8) Sell services and products as part of the rental

Inventory Item Transfer [110 : 15-Nov-2021]


Ship inventory items, using transfer orders, to customers for rent from various business units within the
company. Inventory item transfer supports the transfer of equipment or items when a rental contract is
created.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Manual Link to Related Orders [120 : 15-Nov-2021]


Rental companies can easily associate rental contracts with related orders that are created outside the
Rental Management system.

This feature enables users to:


- Retrieve sales, purchase, and service orders created using standalone JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
applications, that match the item number, company, and business unit combination of the rental contract
- Attach the related orders to the rental contract.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Gives rental companies the flexibility to create related orders outside the Rental Management
system and use the related orders for processing rental contracts.

Fixed or Variable Exchange Rate [130 : 15-Nov-2021]


Rental companies can choose to use a fixed exchange rate or a variable exchange rate for rental
billing. If they use a variable exchange rate, they can choose the date for retrieving the exchange rate.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 94 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Provides rental companies more flexibility when billing rental contracts for various business
needs.

Partial Returns [140 : 15-Nov-2021]


Rental companies can automate partial returns of one of more items on a rental contract and continue
billing for the items that are yet to be returned by the customer. The returned items are subsequently
processed through the appropriate disposition routes (reworked, stocked, scrapped, or rejected).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Enables rental companies to handle the business need of managing partial returns of items
from customers.

Rental Contract Ledger [150 : 15-Nov-2021]


Rental companies can quickly view and research all changes and transactions associated with
customers rental contracts, review patterns, research errors, answer customer queries, and improve
customer service.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: A comprehensive view of all the changes and updates made to customers rental contracts
enables rental companies to improve their rental business and improve customer service.

Multiple lines for a sales order and purchase order [160 : 15-Nov-2021]
The feature enables users to generate a single sales order or purchase order from a rental contract that
has multiple detail lines.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Rental contract specialists can view the status of all the associated lines on a rental contract
by bringing up a single sales order or purchase order.
Notes: GA on April 21, 2015.

Auto-cancellation of related orders [170 : 15-Nov-2021]


The feature enables the automatic cancellation of associated related orders (sales orders, purchase
orders, and service orders) when users cancel rental contracts.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: When you automate the closing of related orders for a cancelled rental contract, you reduce
the possibility of errors that can occur due to manual closing.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 95 of 202
Rental item shipping information [180 : 15-Nov-2021]
The feature enables users to quickly view sales order shipping information for rental items.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Rental contract specialists can quickly and easily inform the customer when their rental items
and consumable goods have shipped.

Auto-update of inventory availability after Inbound Receipt Routing [190 : 15-Nov-2021]


The feature enables the automatic update of inventory availability when a service order or a sales order
(created during the Inbound Receipt Routing process) gets completed.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Rental contract specialists can accurately view inventory movement and availability of rental
items.

Rental Contract Terms [20 : 15-Nov-2021]


Record the terms of the rental contract including the ship-to and deliver-to addresses; rental dates, and
delivery and billing/invoicing details .
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Rental Management [200 : 12-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Rental Management:
- Rental Operations Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 96 of 202
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Improved Availability Check for Serialized Items [210 : 25-Jun-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Rental Management system has been enhanced to allow a serialized
item to be reserved on a rental contract when the item is currently rented out on another contract or at
another customer's site. Previously, serialized items that were on a contract and shipped to a customer
could not be reserved and added to a new contract.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

New and Improved Rental Item Availability [220 : 21-Apr-2022]


Rental operations manager can now take advantage of the new Rental Item Availability JET program
that provides an intuitive interface with an improved UI and visibility to the rental items that are available,
committed to a reservation, or rented out. This personnel can easily see a Gantt visualization of
availability and commitment along with the ability to view rental information by item, branch, and specific
time frame. They can also use the rental item availability Gantt chart to initiate an item transfer from one
branch to another. These capabilities enable them to confidently assign equipment to contracts in real-
time while entering rental contracts, further improving the utilization of rental items.
Note: To download the Electronic Software Updates (ESUs) pertaining to this feature, click Download
Feature and see the dependency.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Identification of Rental Items [30 : 15-Nov-2021]


Identify equipment and items designated as rentals within inventory. Use the provided user-defined
fields to hold additional rental information about the equipment or item.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Inventory Commitment of Rent, and Reserved for Rent Items [40 : 15-Nov-2021]
Manage item reservations using inventory commitments. View equipment and item availability based on
inventory commitments associated to a rental contract.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Integration with Sales, Procurement, Service and Warranty, and Inventory Systems [50 : 15-Nov-
2021]
Generate all related orders (sales, service, and purchase orders) associated with a rental contract based
on line type, rental constants, and rental contract information. Create related orders automatically or
manually. View related orders online or listed in a report.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 97 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Rental Item Workbench [60 : 15-Nov-2021]


Quickly view equipment and items available to rent, rented, or both. View all rental contracts related to a
specific piece of equipment or inventory item.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Rental Billing [70 : 15-Nov-2021]


Invoice rental customers using contract and service billing, based on information in the rental contract
and rental constants. The Rental constants controls the billing method for each rental center (branch
plant).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Equipment Return [80 : 15-Nov-2021]


Return equipment and items to inventory using inbound receipt routing application in procurement.
Inbound receipt routing manages the disposition of items - returned to inventory, rejected (converted to a
sales order), reworked (sent for servicing), or scrapped.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Asset Depreciation Allocation [90 : 15-Nov-2021]


Automatically calculate and move the depreciation expense of equipment (serialized items) from the
rental center (business unit) to the business unit that has the item rented out.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 98 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Integrations
Oracle Value Chain Planning

Global Order Promising Integration Using Oracle VCP [20 : 11-May-2023]


Customers often need to receive immediate feedback about their orders. Using JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne and Global Order Promising (GOP) integration customers can be promised a specific
delivery date at the time that their order is entered into the system. The GOP integration reviews
inventory outstanding work orders manufacturing routings location of distribution centers calendars and
company order-promising preferences to determine the feasibility of meeting a customer requested
delivery date.

The integration between JD Edwards EnterpriseOne supply chain and Global Order Promising within
Oracle's Value Chain Planning enables users to provide delivery dates to customers in real-time while
taking into account the following complexities of the supply chain:

- Multi-level bill of materials and manufacturing


- Deliver lead time
- Internal inter-organizational delivery lead times
- Resource and material constraints
- Supplier constraints
- Multiple sourcing options
- End item substitutes
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Industrial Manufacturing
Benefits: - Through GOP users are able to optimize the internal costs of supplying customers using
available inventory unused production capacity or a combination of both

- This also results in making inventory more flexible by reducing the need to consume expensive
warehouse space with finished or semi-finished goods
Examples: Consider this sequence:

Step 1 - The customer service representative enters order information in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Sales Order Entry program and submits the sales order inquiry for order promising.

Step 2 - JD Edwards EnterpriseOne sends the sales order information to GOP.

Step 3 - GOP attempts to fulfill the order. GOP first consumes available inventory (ATP) and then

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 99 of 202
manufacturing capacity or resources (CTP) if applicable.

Step 4 - GOP returns the results of the query to E1 Sales Order Entry including details about how GOP
has fulfilled the order.

Step 5 - The customer service representative can commit the order if the customer is agreeable to the
proposed fulfillment option. Alternatively they can resubmit the customer order using a different request
date or quantity.
Notes: With the addition of Global Order Promising the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to Value Chain
Planning Integration fully replaces the Numetrix integration. For release 9.1 the Numetric Integration not
supported. The 8.12 and 9.0 Numetric Integrations still supported based on the Applications Unlimited
policy.

Released 20 March 2013.

Validated Integration with Value Chain Planning 12.2.5.1 [40 : 03-Jun-2021]


Customers upgrading to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 9.2 can take advantage of the validated integration
with Value Chain Planning 12.2.5.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Integration Industry: (All Industries)

Integration JD Edwards and Global Order Promising - Sourcing [50 : 16-Oct-2017]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and VCP Global Order Promising integration provides:
- Maximized supply utilization, increased order promising accuracy, and faster responsiveness to
customer order requests through optimal sourcing from GOP in real time.
- Flexibility to determine source of supply either through Global Order Promiser's advanced sourcing
logic or through the regular JD Edwards sales order system, based on your business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Integration Industry:
Benefits: The new capabilities will encourage you to leverage advanced promising capabilities of GOP
along with JD Edwards, offering you an optimal sourcing solution.

Applications Business Services

Web Services for Employee Master and Employee Recruitment [20 : 18-Apr-2015]
This feature provides web services that enable customers to set up integrations between JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne tables for employee and requisition data with other Oracle systems or with third-party
systems.

These web services enable users to:


- Get requisition data from the EnterpriseOne requisitions tables;
- Get employee data from EnterpriseOne employee tables
- Create, update, or delete employee data in EnterpriseOne tables
- Create pending employee data in the EnterpriseOne pending employee tables.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 100 of 202
Benefits: After setting up the integrations, users can import and export requisition and employee
onboarding information including media attachments such as resumes, W-4, I-9 or other forms.
Customers achieve greater time-to-benefit leveraging purpose-built interface objects when creating an
integration that meets their specific needs.

These web services support the integration with Oracle Taleo Cloud Service.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 101 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Localization
European Union (EU)

SEPA Direct Debit Update V7.0 [110 : 08-Apr-2015]


Oracle has updated the SEPA Direct Debit XML files to comply with version 7.0 of the European
Payments Council (EPC) Technical Specifications.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Available for past releases: 8.12, 9.0 and 9.1

SEPA Credit Transfer Update V7.0 [120 : 08-Apr-2015]


Oracle has updated the SEPA Credit Transfer XML files to comply with V7.0 of the European Payments
Council (EPC) Technical Specifications. The project introduced several enhancements. In particular the
SEPA Credit Transfer XML file initiation will now be done via BI Publisher, following the same approach
as the SEPA Direct Debit XML initiation process.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Available for past releases: 8.12, 9.0, 9.1

EU SEPA - Direct Debit 2015 Changes [140 : 05-Apr-2016]


For the SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) automatic debit process, this feature provides the ability to select
certain mandate types when processing SEPA Direct Debits. You can generate either a single XML file
for all of the mandate sequence types or multiple XML files, each corresponding to a mandate sequence
type.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2016)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

EU SEPA 2014 - Edit checking before file creation [150 : 05-Apr-2016]


The system validates all information required to process SEPA payments during the payment group
creation process (SEPA credit transfer) and in the R03B571 program (SEPA direct debit).

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 102 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2016)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

EU SEPA 2014 - SEPA Direct Debit XML Based on Draft Remittance [160 : 05-Apr-2016]
You can generate SEPA Direct Debit (SDD) XML payment format via the draft remittance process.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2016)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

EU-Bank Payment ISO20022 CGI Format [170 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Common Global Implementation (CGI) initiative is a forum promoting wider acceptance of ISO
20022 as a common XML standard used between corporate enterprises and banks. JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Localization for CGI provides payment and collection formats that support the ISO 20022
CGI Core format.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: •Support for new payment standards
•Validations based on ISO 20022 CGI Core format requirements
Notes: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.

EU SEPA - Enhancements for Batch Booking Flag [180 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Batch Booking Flag processing option is removed from the SEPA Credit Transfer program, SEPA
Direct Debit Extractor report, and SEPA Direct Debit for Draft Remittance Extractor report.

Note: This is also applicable to releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

OECD Standard Audit File Tax Purposes (SAF-T) Generic Extractor Report [190 : 21-Jun-2018]
The Standard Audit File for Tax Purposes (SAF-T) is a standardized XML file used for exporting the
accounting information of a company to the tax authorities. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system
generates the SAF-T XML report in version 2.0 format for XML documents.

Note: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

LOC - EU - Batch Booking Processing for SEPA Direct Debit [200 : 03-Oct-2018]
The Batch Booking flag of the SEPA Direct Debit Extractor (R743005) determines the number of SEPA
direct debit entries to be created.
If the processing option Batch Booking Flag in the General tab of R743005 is set to TRUE, the

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 103 of 202
generated XML file contains a single batch entry for the sum of the amounts. If set to FALSE, the
generated XML file contains individual entries for each of the transactions.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.

Change: Added in Release 9.2


Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The Batch Booking functionality of the SEPA Direct Debit Extractor enables customers
having multiple postings in a day to manage bank reconciliation.

European Union - Electronic Invoicing for Receivables (B2G) [210 : 14-May-2019]


According to recent regulation modifications, companies in European Union are required to issue digital
version of the invoices complying with a new format defined as the Core Invoice (EN16391). The
European Union countries are allowed to define a country specific version (CIUS). EnterpriseOne
Localizations for European Union allows customers to generate the required electronic invoices in XML
based on EN16391 standards using a common template. User can modify this template based on the
country specific version (CIUS) before submitting the invoice to the tax authority.

NOTE: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


IMPORTANT NOTE - The ESUs for 9.0 are only available for download by customers that have
purchased Market-Driven Support for 9.0 legislative support. Reference article for more information:
https://support.us.oracle.com/oip/faces/secure/km/DocumentDisplay.jspx?id=1613249.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

EU – Customer/Supplier Balance Report Updates [220 : 09-Apr-2019]


A new processing option is added for the Generate Supplier Balance A/P Report (R7404003) and the
Customer/Supplier Balance Report (R7404002) that enables you to set up the Company value. These
reports are generated based on the Company value provided in the processing option.

Note: Also available for 9.0 and 9.1 releases.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

European Union - Electronic Invoice for Accounts Receivable - XML Response Consumption
(B2G) [230 : 12-Jun-2019]
According to recent regulation modifications, companies in European Union are required to provide a
digital version of the invoices complying with a new format defined as Core Invoice (EN16391) to the tax
authorities. You can use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Localizations to process the response file and
update the status of the electronic invoice in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system.

Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.


IMPORTANT NOTE - The ESUs for 9.0 are only available for download by customers that have
purchased Market-Driven Support for 9.0 legislative support. Reference article for more information:
https://support.us.oracle.com/oip/faces/secure/km/DocumentDisplay.jspx?id=1613249.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of June 2019)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 104 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:

EMEA: New Nature of Transaction Codes for B2B and B2C in Intrastat Reporting [240 : 09-May-
2023]
European Business Statistics (EBS BA) has introduced a new list of Nature of Transaction codes (NoT
codes). Separate Intrastat reporting for business customers (B2B) and private customers (B2C) is
required by using different NoT codes as of January 1, 2022. The current NoT 11 is divided into two
parts: new NoT 11 and new NoT 12. New NoT 11 covers transactions between companies, whereas
new NoT 12 covers transactions involving private consumers. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne program
has been modified to give organizations the option to separate the Intrastat reporting for business
customers (B2B) and private customers (B2C).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2022

EMEA - CGI Payment Support for Non-IBAN Countries [250 : 09-May-2023]


In JD Edwards EnterpriseOne CGI, payments were only supported for European countries or countries
that use IBAN Bank Account Numbers. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne program has been enhanced to
populate the Bank Account Number (F0030.CBNK) as bank account identifier for the Non-IBAN
countries. The CGI Payment Extractor (R744003) program now generates the XML payment file with
this bank account number (CBNK) if the debtor and creditor do not have IBAN. In addition, this program
also eliminates blank tags (IBAN, BIC and CBNK) from the payment file if these fields are not validated
and are blank.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2022

EMEA - Mapping Multiple G/L Trade Accounts to a Single Customer/Supplier [260 : 19-Oct-2022]
OECD Standard Audit File for Tax Purposes (SAF-T) Generic Extractor Report (R705001) is enhanced
to map multiple G/L trade accounts with a single customer/supplier. A single customer/supplier can have
multiple G/L trade accounts. Now the Account ID field is not required to be shown in XML as this is an
optional field and all the account balances will be accumulated and displayed under the opening and
closing balance tags of customers/suppliers.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

EMEA – CGI Payment Support for Bank Clearing System [280 : 20-Apr-2023]
The Payment Information Extractor program (R744003) now enables JD Edwards customers using the
bank clearing system over IBAN or SWIFT to generate
xml files for Common Global Implementation (CGI) payments.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 105 of 202
Colombia

Colombia - Additional Buckets for Taxes and Withholding for AP/PUR [120 : 11-May-2023]
In July 2014, the Sales Order Processing and Accounts Receivable systems were enhanced to allow a
Tax/Rate Area to be defined with an unlimited number of taxes, as opposed to the standard limit of 5
taxes that is imposed by the base EnterpriseOne system. The A/P and Purchasing solution is updated
to support additional taxes for Colombia.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: This will eliminate a manual workaround and provide the tax buckets already available for AR
and Sales Order Processing.
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

Czech Republic

Czech Republic - VAT Control Report [20 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Czech Ministry of Finance has introduced a new VAT Summary Control Report. Czech VAT payers
must submit the VAT Summary Control Report electronically to the tax authority along with their VAT
return effective from January 1, 2016.

The VAT Summary Control Report includes a list of all taxable supplies subject to the Czech VAT or
supplies that are subject to the local reverse charge mechanism. The report also includes information,
such as the VAT registration number, document number, dates of taxable supplies, tax base, applicable
VAT rate, and amount of VAT in the Czech Republic.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1

France

B2G Electronic Invoicing [100 : 21-Jun-2018]


The French government mandates that all invoices issued against all French public sector entities must
be electronic and the electronic invoices must guarantee the issued date, the authenticity of the origin
and integrity of the content. Electronic invoicing involves sending and receiving invoices by automated
electronic means.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Planned Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Benefits from electronic invoicing include reduced manual intervention, less error-prone
processes, and reduced processing times.
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1

Running R74F210 Without Embedded Oracle BIP [110 : 10-Mar-2020]


The FEC Extractor of Statutory Accounting Audit File program (R74F210) can generate a text file
without using the embedded Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher (BIP). This enhancement ensures

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 106 of 202
faster processing of transactions.
Note: Also available for Release 9.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

France - New VAT Report (R74F101) for Goods and Services [120 : 26-Oct-2023]
There are two categories of VAT in France: Goods and Services. Invoices for delivery of goods must be
reported on the voucher date, regardless of their payment status, while service invoices must be
reported based on the date they are paid. Currently, VAT on Receipts and Payments program
(R74F100) enables you to generate VAT report for VAT declared on services. JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Localization for France is enhanced to include a new VAT report (R74F101) to comply
with the legal requirement for the goods VAT category. The new VAT report (R74F101) is the extension
of the older report(R74F100) and enables you to print VAT for both goods and services.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:OCTOBER 2023

FEC - Display FEC Number [90 : 21-Jun-2018]


The FEC Detail Transactions program (P74F201) uses the original document number and FEC
sequential number to access original transactions and view details. The FEC Detail Transactions
program (P74F201) displays all the transactions for the selected sequence number within given dates.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

Germany

Germany - Deferred Invoices and VAT Reporting [30 : 22-Aug-2018]


You can now compute taxes based on the shipment date during the print invoices (R42565) process. A
new processing option is added that enables you to set up compute taxes based on shipment date
functionality.
Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Hungary

Hungary Real-Time Invoice Reporting - Version 3.0 [100 : 20-Oct-2021]


The Hungarian government has published modifications in the existing real-time invoice reporting
structure. The new guidelines state that export transactions can be reported in the Hungarian sales
invoices. Previously, only the invoices with domestic and B2B transactions could be reported. The 3.0
version of the real time invoice will be accepted and all the previous versions will be deprecated. The e-
invoice data extraction process has been modified to comply with the recent changes in the tax
regulations.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 107 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Hungary Electronic Invoice [70 : 21-Jun-2018]


According to recent regulation modifications, companies in Hungary are required to issue a digital
version of the invoices issued against Hungarian government entities as of January 2016. The
information in this electronic document must be issued as an Extensible Markup Language (XML) file
that complies with certain format and content specifications.
This solution allows customers using EnterpriseOne Localizations for Hungary to generate the required
electronic XML invoices.

In addition, the enhancement provides a framework for Oracle, partners, or customers to simplify the
process of developing and applying country-specific electronic invoice solutions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: • Save time and costs by generating, managing and storing fiscal book records for eligible
transactions digitally, without having to print or store physical physical records.
• Simplify the audit process of your records for these transactions.
• Avoid potential rejections of your invoices due to formal errors.
• Save time and costs to develop electronic invoice solutions for other countries.
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

Hungary - E-Invoice Data Extraction and Response [80 : 16-Sep-2018]


According to an announcement by the Hungarian government, businesses issuing B2B sales invoices
by means of invoicing software are required to provide invoice data to the Hungarian Tax Authorities
(HTA). You can use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne solution to extract the e-invoice data and process
the response file.

Note: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Hungary Real-Time Invoice Reporting - Version 2.0 [90 : 17-Nov-2020]


The Hungarian government has published modifications in the existing real-time invoice reporting
structure. The new guidelines state that domestic invoices with foreign currency also need to be
reported. Previously, only the invoices with Hungarian currency were required to be reported. The e-
invoice data extraction process has been modified to comply with the recent changes in the tax
regulations.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Argentina

Argentina Resolution 3685 [110 : 21-Jun-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 108 of 202
The General Regulation 3685/2014 published by the Argentinean fiscal authorities, replaces the 1361
RG referring to the rate of emission and storage of electronic duplicates of receipts and registration of
operations, the RG 3034 and RG 2457 CITI resolutions; the regulation establishes new reporting
requirements for Purchase and Sales transactions.
According to these regulation modifications, certain companies in Argentina are required to maintain
records through electronic systems that can create .txt files with information about their transactions.

Taxpayers must be able to generate different types of .txt files that include the following information:
• Information that identifies the reporting company and the period for the presentation
• Sales data, including invoice information, VAT amounts by invoice and tax rate.
• Purchase data, including voucher information, VAT amounts by voucher and tax rate.
• Import data, with VAT amounts by tax rate.
• Services import data, including voucher and payment information

The information in these electronic documents must be issued as a .txt file that complies with certain
format and content specifications. You then report this information to the fiscal authorities by submitting
these files to the fiscal authority periodically.

Customers can use EnterpriseOne Localizations for Argentina to generate the required electronic
reports.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: • Save time by generating the required reports automatically.
• Save costs by managing and storing fiscal reports digitally, without having to print or store physical
records.
• Avoid potential rejections of your reports due to formal errors by generating reports that comply with
the format and content requirements.
• Simplify the audit process of your records for these transactions.
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

AFIP - SIRE (RG3726) [120 : 24-Jul-2015]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne enables Argentinean companies that are withholding agents to create
withholding certificates by using the new tax authority software, SIRE (Sistema Integrado Retenciones
Electronicas). Argentinean companies are required to submit text files to the Administracion Federal de
Ingresos Publicos (AFIP) for SUSS withholdings and profit withholding to external beneficiaries. The
AFIP uses the SIRE software to create withholding certificates and provides a 25-digit certificate
number. The companies can then update the certificate number for SUSS withholdings and profit
withholding to external beneficiaries.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2015)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Argentina RG 3665 and 3666 - CAI on Invoice C [130 : 24-Jun-2015]


The regime regulated by the General Resolutions RG3665 and RG3666 published by the fiscal authority
in Argentina (AFIP - Administracion Federal de Ingresos Públicos) requires that taxpayers registered as
small contributors include the CAI (auto-printer code) number for the type C vouchers they issue. These
taxpayers also need to re-start the voucher numbering sequence.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 109 of 202
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Localizations for Argentina enable users to add CAI numbers on supplier
vouchers type C, and a solution to handle the duplication control system, using a new processing option.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Argentina RG 3732 - VAT Withholding [140 : 11-May-2023]


RG 3732 is a legal resolution that updates articles 8, 9 and 10 of existing RG 2854 (22/6/2010). These
articles detail how to calculate VAT Withholding must be calculated under specific circumstances:
- Art 8: Defines that the calculation base is now the VAT amount instead of the taxable amount.
- Art 9: Defines that the withholding amount must be 100% of VAT when the supplier is under penalty or
when the voucher exceeds $10000 if the company claims compensation in exports.
- Art 10: Establishes that if the VAT is not detailed in the invoice, the calculation must use the estimated
VAT (estimated VAT = Invoice amount * (VAT Rate / 100+VAT Rate). The previous calculation was
based on the voucher gross amount..

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Localizations for Argentina allows you to define the VAT Withholding
calculation basis to use.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

New AFIP TXT File Structure [150 : 21-Jun-2018]


The tax authority of Argentina has changed the structure of the AFIP TXT file. The TXT file is used in
uploading data to the EnterpriseOne table Supplier Information RG 726 - 04 (F76A8011). The new
layout for Supplier Information AFIP General Resolution N° 4035/2017 is PROVO517N. The JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne system is updated to reflect the new structure.

Note: This update is also available for Releases 9.1 and 9.0.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Argentina General Resolution AFIP (Administration Federal de Ingresos Públicos) Update


4290/2018 [160 : 16-Apr-2019]
The new Argentina General Resolution AFIP 4290 directs JDE to accommodate 3 characters for the
AFIP document type (which is currently 2 characters) and 5 characters for Issue place (which is
currently 4 characters) while generating legal numbering and validating the legal numbering.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Argentina General Resolution AFIP (Administration Federal de Ingresos Públicos) Update


4245/2018 [170 : 02-Jul-2019]
AFIP General Resolution No. 4245/2018 Income Taxes. General Resolution 830 has been amended.
There are three articles in this General Resolution. For Article 3, the user needs to set two different

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 110 of 202
withholding percentages for nonregistered suppliers who are individual and corporate suppliers.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Argentina— General Resolution 4523 (SIRE and SICORE VAT Withholding and VAT Perception
Changes) [180 : 25-Feb-2020]
Argentina General Resolution 4523 introduces a revised withholding system by changing how the VAT
withholding and VAT perception tax calculations are defined and reported for the sales and accounts
receivable invoice processes. The new resolution requires VAT withholding to be excluded from
SICORE and included in SIRE.

The Step - II A/R transactions (RG738) (R76A94) program, which was a part of SICORE, is now
obsolete. This program has been replaced by Step - II A/R Transactions (RG4523) (R76A95) program,
which is now a part of SIRE.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Argentina - Withholding Calculations by Parent Company Tax ID and Concept [190 : 09-May-
2023]
JD Edwards allows withholding calculations for suppliers based on the combination of Parent Company
Tax ID and Concept.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Argentina - Automatic Payment Programs Updated to Allow Alternate Payment with Three
Currencies [200 : 22-Jun-2022]
The Check - Arg 04 (P760472A) print program now provides the option to create intermediate financial
records for the alternate payment set up for the check payment instrument with three currencies.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

RG 715 VAT Specifications by AFIP [210 : 16-Oct-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system is updated to comply with AFIP RG 715 for VAT. AFIP RG 715
for VAT specifications include:

•Regimen (Perception code)


•CUIT Agente (Tax ID)
•Nro Comprobante (Invoice Number)
•Importe Retencion (Withholding amount)
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:OCTOBER 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 111 of 202
India

Validating CENVAT Credit on Reverse Charge [300 : 18-Apr-2015]


This feature enables you to use CENVAT credit to validate reverse tax if you have already paid the
service provider.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Available for prior releases: 9.0, 9.1

Service Tax Exclusion on TDS [310 : 18-Apr-2015]


The TDS calculation process enables you to exclude the service tax in a payable transaction while
calculating the applicable TDS. The system computes the taxable amount after subtracting the service
tax from the net payable.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Available for prior releases: 9.0, 9.1

India Federal Budget for Financial year 2015-2016 [320 : 11-May-2023]


India Localizations are modified as per the changes to the India Federal Budget 2015-16 with effect from
March 1, 2015. The Education CESS and Higher Education CESS Excise Duty is fully exempted. The
CESS and HCESS tax types are removed as part of the budget.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

India NSDL e-TDS and e-TCS Returns [330 : 11-May-2023]


NSDL (National Securities Deposit Limited) has revised the data structure in which TDS (Tax Deducted
at Source) and TCS (Tax Collected at Source) quarterly returns need to be filed. Data structure for
electronic reporting of returns in form 26Q and 27Q had undergone a change.

The Localizations for India software was updated to include the following:
- The PAN number is a 10-digit alphanumeric character.
- The AIN value is mandatory for statements pertaining to FY 2013-14 onwards for forms 26Q, 27Q, and
27EQ.
- The Nature of Remittance field value is mandatory for statements pertaining to FY 2013-14 onwards.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

India Service Tax SBC (Swachh Bharat Cess) [340 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Central Board of Excise and Customs through Notification No. 21 and 22 dated November 6, 2015
announced that Swachh Bharat Cess @ 0.5% will be introduced with effect from November 15, 2015.
The new Cess would be applicable for all services that are subject to levy of Service tax.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 112 of 202
The taxable basis for computation of Swachh Bharat Cess will be on the value of Taxable Services that
is currently applicable for computation of Service tax.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Planned Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1

India Service Tax Krishi Kalyan Cess (KKC) [350 : 21-Jun-2018]


The India Union Budget for 2016-17 was presented in the Parliament on February 29, 2016. During the
budget presentation, the Finance Minister proposed new taxes, that is, Krishi Kalyan Cess (KKC). The
Service Tax Krishi Kalyan Cess (KKC) is applicable for all services that are subject to the levy of Service
Tax.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Planned Type: Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

India Goods and Services Tax [360 : 21-Jun-2018]


New JD Edwards EnterpriseOne setup programs are now available to set up your system for the Goods
and Services Tax (GST).

Change: Added in Release 9.2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The setup programs will enable you to prepare your system to process transactions
according to the GST regulations set up by the government of India.

Note: The programs are also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.
Notes: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.

Addition of Cess to the India Goods and Services Tax (GST) [400 : 21-Jun-2018]
The government of India has introduced GST cess as a new GST type. This impacts GST processes for
the procure-to-pay (P2P) and order-to-cash (O2C) cycles. All programs and reports that you use to
perform these processes are enhanced to support this legislative update.

Also, the GST GL Offset Setup program (P75I835) is now available for you to define the GL offset used
to retrieve trade accounts for P2P and O2C transactions. The GL Offset processing option that you used
earlier to define the GL offset code has been removed from these programs - Calculate GST for AP
Vouchers program (R75I804), GST Credit Distribution program (P75I831), Matching Advance Payment
With Sales Invoice program (P75I828), GST Advance Payment program (P75I827), and Tax Liability
Reverse Charge program (R75I801).

Note: This feature is also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.

Change: Added in Release 9.2

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 113 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.

India GST - Reports [420 : 21-Jun-2018]


New JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs are available for you to extract data for creating various GST
reports.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs provides various reports that enable you to:
-Extract data about sales and A/R transactions that the taxpayer has completed for a particular month
for preparing the GSTR1 report.
-Extract data about purchase and AP transactions for a particular month for preparing the GSTR2
report.
-Summarize the tax information in the GST Tax File table using the GST Tax File Summarization report.
-Offset GST input tax credit (ITC) for purchased goods that are personally consumed by the purchaser
using the Personal Consumption Update ITC report.
-Using the Tax Liability Reverse Charge report, adjust the cash ledger with the GST amounts that the
goods and service provider must pay to the fiscal authority.
- Claim ITC for non-reverse purchase and AP transactions using the Claim ITC for Non-Reverse
Purchase and AP Transactions program (R75I821).
- File your return using the monthly return report - GSTR-3B Information Extract Report - IND - 75I
(R75I822).

Note: The programs are also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.
Notes: The programs are also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.

India – Logged Vouchers Support for Voucher Redistribution Process [430 : 27-Nov-2018]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne now supports the logged voucher processing functionality for GST
transactions. Users can enter logged vouchers for GST transactions and later review and redistribute
them to the correct GL accounts.

Note: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

India GST - Place of Supply [440 : 13-Feb-2019]


These JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs are updated to include information about the place of
supply: Voucher Match Process for Purchase Order program (P4314), Voucher Entry Process for
Purchase Order program (P0411), and Advance Payment Process for Purchase A/P Transactions
program (P75I838).

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 114 of 202
Cancellation of Sales Order Invoice without Tax Information [450 : 09-Jul-2019]
The GST Invoice Cancellation for Sales Order (P75I816) is a new program which allows the user to
cancel a sales invoice incase the required GST information is not updated in the invoice. The program
also displays all the sales invoices in the system including cancelled and active invoices.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Invoice Reference Number (IRN) for GST Invoice [460 : 10-Sep-2019]


Based on directions from the Central Board of Indirect Taxes, the electronic infrastructure is being
developed for uploading tax invoice information to the GSTN portal in real time. Taxpayers are
mandated to print the Invoice Reference Number (IRN) that is generated by GSTN while printing the tax
invoices for B2B and B2G Taxable supplies.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs for generating tax invoice under GST are updated to include
the Invoice Reference Number (IRN) to ensure compliance with the directions from the Central Board of
Indirect Taxes. A program is also included to update the IRN details for the GST invoices.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of September 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

India GST—Revised Reporting 2020 [470 : 11-Mar-2020]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne program is updated to provide data extraction functionality for periodic
returns ( ANX1 and RET1). The updated program also includes the feature to extract purchase
information for reconciliation with ANX2 information. This feature enables users to update ANX2
information and Input Tax Claim balance in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)


Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

India—Goods and Services Tax (GST) Electronic Invoicing [480 : 07-Jul-2020]


The Central Board of Indirect Taxes had introduced certain amendments to existing GST rules that
would be effective from October 1, 2020. According to the notifications issued, all GST-registered
taxpayers having turnover of more than INR 100 crore in the previous financial year are mandated to
electronically register their invoice information in a prescribed manner with the National Invoice Registry
(IRP) and get the Invoice Reference Number (IRN) from the portal along with other details including data
for the QR code. The inbound information from the IRP on successful electronic filing of the invoice data
must be incorporated into the tax invoice that is printed from the ERP or accounting system of the
taxpayer. Tax invoice generated from an ERP or accounting system without the IRN and QR code will
not be considered as a valid tax invoice.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 115 of 202
India Localizations—Tax Collected at Source (TCS) Amendments 2020 [490 : 08-Sep-2020]
Below features are added in India Localization to support new regulations for Tax Collected at Source
(TCS). This regulation requires to apply TCS on the proceeds received from sale of goods beyond a
specified threshold (INR 5 million) on which TDS has been not been deducted by buyer under any other
provision of the Income Tax Act.

1. Configure TCS rates and Threshold limits for Receipts from Customer
2. Calculate TCS as a self-assessed tax when the cumulative amount of proceeds received from a
customer on account of sale of goods exceeds the specified threshold
3. Create a debit note for the customer to collect TCS.
4. Payment of TCS to Tax Authority
5 TCS Reports Amendments
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

India - GST Localization of Transportation Management Freight Update Process [500 : 25-Mar-
2021]
According to the legislative rules in India, Goods and Services Tax (GST) is applicable on freight
charges. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne India Localization system has been enhanced to enable GST
calculation on freight charges created from the Transportation Management System. The related
processes for Transportation, Sales, and Purchase have also been enhanced to support this capability.

To download all the Electronic Software Updates (ESUs) pertaining to this feature, use the following
query on Change Assistant:
India - GST on Freight

Use this link to install Change Assistant: https://updatecenter.oracle.com/apps/WebSearch/download.


jsp?pkgName=ChangeAssistant.html&pkgType=70&pkgPlatform=70
Visit My Oracle Support for FAQ on Change Assistant: Document ID 1057524.1
https://support.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?id=1057524.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

India - GST Services Using Non-Stock Items and SAC/HSN Code [510 : 17-Nov-2020]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne India Localization system has been modified to enable you to add the
SAC/HSN code in sales transactions for non-stock lines.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) on Purchase of Goods [520 : 09-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne software is modified to support Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) on
purchase of goods that has been introduced in Section 194Q of the Finance Act of India in 2021.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 116 of 202
India – Automate TDS Configuration [530 : 11-Apr-2023]
The India TDS solution has been enhanced to automate the TDS configuration. Customers can now use
the newly developed standard program (R75I411) to automate the current manual TDS configuration.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Italy

Italy Electronic Invoice [110 : 21-Jun-2018]


According to recent regulation modifications, companies in Italy are required to issue a digital version of
the invoices issued against Italian government entities as of March 2015. The information in this
electronic document must be issued as an Extensible Markup Language (XML) file that complies with
certain format and content specifications.
This solution allows customers using EnterpriseOne Localizations for Italy to generate the required
electronic XML invoices.

In addition, the enhancement provides a framework for Oracle, partners, or customers to simplify the
process of developing and applying country-specific electronic invoice solutions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: • Save time and costs by generating, managing and storing fiscal book records for eligible
transactions digitally, without having to print or store physical physical records.
• Simplify the audit process of your records for these transactions.
• Avoid potential rejections of your invoices due to formal errors.
• Save time and costs to develop electronic invoice solutions for other countries.
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1

Italy - Split Payment VAT Report [120 : 11-May-2023]


New VAT rules when billing to public sector entities were introduced to Italy Legal Reference: Budget
Law 2015 in article 17-ter in the VAT law (D.P.R. 633/72).

As of January 01 ,2015, all public sector entities only pay the taxable amount to their suppliers whereas
they pay the tax amount directly to the Revenue Agency. Report R74093S displays the IVA split
payment amount clearly identified in the Summary Register section.

You can use JD Edwards Localizations for Italy to generate VAT reports that clearly identify the amount
for Split Payments and other concepts without including those amounts in the calculations for the total
VAT to credit or debit.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

B2B Electronic Invoice [130 : 21-Jun-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 117 of 202
In August 2015, the Italian government issued a legislative decree in order to encourage B2B electronic
invoicing. This legislative decree states that companies and professionals can opt for B2B electronic
invoicing. When opting for the B2B electronic invoice, companies and professionals will no longer be
obliged to fulfill other fiscal obligations (the Polyvalent Declaration and the Intrastat Declaration for
Purchases of Goods and Services). The applicability date for the decree is January 1, 2017.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: •Both B2G and B2B electronic invoices must be transmitted by electronic means to the
existing electronic platform named "Exchange System".
•B2B electronic invoice replaces the need for traditional paper invoicing.
•Other fiscal obligations need not be fulfilled–the Polyvalent Declaration and Intrastat Declaration for
Purchases of Goods and Services.
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Electronic Invoice Listing and VAT Settlement [140 : 21-Jun-2018]


On 22 October 2016, the Italian government issued a law decree that introduced the following changes:
- The payable and receivable invoice information must be submitted to the Revenue Agency
electronically.
- The legal requirements for Customer and Supplier Listing Declaration (Spesometro), Black List
Declaration for the transaction with blacklisted countries, and the Republic of San Marino Purchases
Declaration are obsolete.
The new law is applicable from 1 January 2017. The electronic transmission must be done for each
quarter with an exception for the year 2017. The date for submitting the electronic transmission for the
year 2017 is mentioned below:
- For the period January - June, the file must be submitted by 16 September 2017.
- For the period July - December, the file must be submitted by 28 February 2018.

Note: Available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: - Sending the Payables and Receivables invoice information electronically to the Revenue
Agency is easier than sending the reports physically.
- No requirement to fulfill other fiscal obligations – Customer and Supplier Listing Declaration
(Spesometro), Black List Declaration, and the Republic of San Marino Purchases Declaration.

Italy – B2B Electronic Invoicing [150 : 05-Oct-2018]


The existing Italy e-invoice template is modified to add the Tax Representative field that holds the
address book number for the tax representative. The Italy Electronic Listing report (R74Y063) is
modified to enable you to exclude domestic receivables transactions when you generate the report.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Italy - Vouchers for Extra-EU Supplier [160 : 14-Nov-2018]


Italian companies are required to book customs vouchers by adding the alpha name of the extra-EU
supplier that supplied the goods. The Electronic Listing for Italy report (R74Y063) and the Monthly VAT

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 118 of 202
report (R004051) are modified to get supplier-related details from the linked transaction for extra-EU
transactions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Identify Transactions of Foreign Customers [170 : 19-Dec-2018]


We have updated the application to include an option to specify the resident status of a customer.
The following modifications are made in the Print Legal Document report (R7430040):
- Print block 1.4.2 (Sede) for both B2B (FormatoTransmissione) = FPR12 and B2G
(FormatoTransmissione) = FPA12 transactions.
- Print block 1.4.3 (StabileOrganizzazione) if (FormatoTransmissione) = FPR12 and the customer is a
non-resident in Italy but is doing prevalent and permanent business in Italy.
- Print block 1.4.4 (Rappresentanteiscale) if (FormatoTransmissione) = FPR12 and the customer is a
non-resident in Italy but working with a tax representative to do business in Italy.

Note: Also available for Release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: Also available for 9.1 release.

New UDCs added to the Italy Electronic Invoice Program [180 : 13-Aug-2019]
The Italy Electronic Invoice program (R7030040) has been modified to include a new section
"DatiPagamento" in the e-invoice XML file. This section includes new header fields such as payment
term and payment instrument. New user defined codes (UDCs) have been included to enable the user
to update the payment term and payment instrument fields for this section.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of August 2019)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Generate and Print Intrastat Information Based on Declarant Company [190 : 04-Feb-2020]
This update enables the user to generate Intrastat information based on the declarant company. The
system can now have one active declaration for a declarant company. This feature enables the user to
view declarations in a grid format, and print the Italy Intrastat Services Declarations Report (R74Y020)
for the selected declaration.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

e-Filing of Payables Invoices [200 : 13-Jan-2021]


A new program facilitates printing of payable invoices in an XML format for Italy. This capability will
enable the user to select the accounts payable transactions and submit them to the Italian tax authority.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of January 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 119 of 202
Dichiarazione D'intento Protocollo Field for Italy Customer in Italy Electronic Invoice [210 : 10-
Mar-2021]
A new field protocol number has been added to the Work With Address Book Additional Information
form in the Italy Localization Guide. The protocol number is generated by the tax authority. With this
enhancement the user can manually update the protocol number in the Work With Address Book
Additional Information form.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Japan

Japan Densai e-Recorded Claims [150 : 18-Apr-2015]


The Japan Electronically Recorded Monetary Claims Act was passed to facilitate business operator's
financing activities.The 'Densai' claim method is a critical business process across all industries and is
most applicable for mid-market companies. The solution encompasses the necessary payment
functionality as well as the output data files in the required layout and format.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Available for 9.1

Mexico

Mexico Electronic Accounting [70 : 21-Apr-2015]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne software complies with the requirements of Tax Resolution for 2014
Electronic Media Accounting as part of the 2014 Mexican tax reform:.
Appendix 24 contains specific information and regulations concerning how this accounting information
should be uploaded to the SAT (Tax Administration Services) Internet portal. According to rule I.2.8.6.,
taxpayers must maintain accounting records through electronic systems that can create XML format
files, which include the following information:
- Catalogo (Chart of accounts): Companies must report transactions using the Company chart of
accounts and the corresponding agglutination code, according to the catalog published by the SAT.
- Balanza (Summary Trial Balance): This file includes beginning balances, movements of the period
(sum of debit and sum of credit) and ending balances of each and every one of the accounts of assets,
liabilities, capital, results (revenues, costs, expenses) and off-balance sheet accounts.
- Polizas (Journals): Companies must report detailed transaction information, including the account,
subaccount, as well as its auxiliary accounts involved in the operations.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: • Save time and costs when generating, managing and storing fiscal book records.
• Simplify the audit process (internal and external) of your accounting records.
• Reduce time preparing the reports and presenting them to the fiscal authorities.
• Avoid potential rejections of fiscal documentation due to formal errors.
Notes: Available for past releases: 9.0. 9.1

Mexico Electronic Accounting Update Ver 1.3 [80 : 21-Jun-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 120 of 202
The Electronic Accounting specification is a mandatory requirement for Mexico and impacts all the local
and foreign multinational enterprises. All the accounting solution providers in Mexico will be required to
fully comply with the new specifications and make the relevant improvements if necessary.
According to rule I.2.8.6., taxpayers must maintain accounting records through electronic systems that
can create XML format files. In December 2014, SAT published changes to the following XML files:

XML: CATALOGO - Chart of Accounts


XML: BALANZA - Trial Balance
XML: POLIZAS – Information related to journal entries in the accounting records
XML: AUXILIAR_CTAS – Auxiliary Report of Accounts

The Mexican regulation for Electronic Accounting XML adjustments has to use the new layouts v1.3.

Note: This feature is also available in Releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Mexico Electronic Accounting Update Vers 1.3 - Polizas [90 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Mexican Government now associates fiscal documents to AP and AR payments through new
electronic invoices regulations 3.3. The new version 1.3 of Electronic Accounting now requires UUIDs
(fiscal document keys) for the new fiscal document for Received payments; however, the original invoice
has its own CFDI_UUID.

Note: The Received payment fiscal document is required only for cases where the collection will come
later, such as 15 days or 30 days, and in installments. If the payment is in advance or is immediate, the
document is not required.

This feature is also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Peru

Peru Legal Reports Update for RS No. 361- 2015 [30 : 21-Jun-2018]
To comply with SUNAT (Peru regulatory authority) specifications under RS No. 361-2015, the following
reports have been updated:
- R76P9003 (Daily Book)
- R76P9421 (Account Ledger by Object Account)
- R76P9470 (Account Ledger by Category Code)
- R76P4500 (IGV Purchase Ledger)
- R76P3B40 (IGV Sales Ledger)
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Compliance with SUNAT(Peru) Tax Authority for IGV Taxes for AP Invoices [40 : 27-Sep-2023]
According to the Peru Tax Authority, the new VAT Purchasing report must include the Period, Unique
Operation Code, and Correlative number of the accounting entry identified in field 2 when the Unique

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 121 of 202
Operation Code (CUO) is used. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system is updated to stay compliant
with this regulation.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:SEPTEMBER 2023

Peru Resolution of the Superintendence for Sales VAT Tax File to Peru Tax Authority [50 : 12-
Jan-2024]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne enhances the Sales VAT Tax File to make it compliant with the legal
requirements laid by and for submission to the Peru tax authority.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2024

Poland

VAT Invoice Amendment [100 : 20-May-2020]


In the VAT Invoices program (R74P503), new tag names have been added to the VAT Invoice XML for
prepayment invoices for sales orders, along with other changes. A new processing option to specify the
document type for split invoices or vouchers has been included in this enhancement.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of May 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Poland VAT Registers and Declaration [110 : 22-Sep-2020]


A new register, Poland VAT Registers and Declaration (JPK_VAT7M), is added to report the sales and
purchase transactions performed during the declaration period in Poland. This register will replace the
existing register, Sales and Purchase VAT Registers program (R74P501).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Poland - Enhanced Split VAT Payment (R704012) to Process All Correct Vouchers [120 : 27-Jun-
2023]
This feature enables the user to process all of the correct vouchers during the Split VAT Payment
without stopping the process if any supplier's setup is missing. JD Edwards customers can now run the
Split Voucher VAT report (R704012) on scheduler with a wider data selection.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2023

Voucher Match Automation [50 : 21-Jun-2018]


To enable users in Poland to use voucher match automation, country-specific data are loaded into
F0411 tag tables to generate a valid and legal voucher according to Poland law. The user enters

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 122 of 202
Poland-specific data in a new application for use in the VMA process. The system performs Poland-
pecific validations.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

XML Unified Audit Files for Poland [60 : 21-Jun-2018]


Starting July 1, 2016, all registered companies in Poland must produce audit documentation on request
by the Polish tax authorities. The audit documentation must be in an electronic format called Jednolity
Plik Kontrolny (JPK) prescribed by the Ministry of Finance for Poland.
The audit file must be in an XML format consisting of these sections:

- Sales and Purchase VAT Registers


- VAT Invoices
- Bank Statements
- Accounting Books
- Inventory Transactions

The tax authorities can request for partial delivery of any audit file section. To facilitate this, JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne provides you these programs to print each section of the XML file separately:

- Sales and Purchase VAT Registers program (R74P501)


- VAT Invoices program (R74P503)
- Accounting Books - POL - 74P program (R74P511)
- Bank Statement - POL - 74P program (R74P507)
- Inventory - POL - 74P program (R74P513)

From February 20, 2018, the XML format for the Sales and Purchase VAT Register has been updated
as per the latest government requirements.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: This feature is also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.

Split Tax Payment [70 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Split Tax Payment feature allows users to split the tax amount that is payable to the supplier and
pay that amount to a payee or the tax authority.

Note: This feature is also available for 9.0 and 9.1 releases.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for 9.0 and 9.1 releases.

Poland - Printing Inventory Validation Report Based on Business Unit [80 : 22-Aug-2018]
Users can generate the Inventory Validation report (R74P513) based on the business unit. A new
processing option is added that enables you to specify the business unit based on which the report is
generated.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 123 of 202
Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Poland: VAT Invoice Modifications [90 : 30-Jul-2019]


The Polish Finance Ministry on 20 March 2019 published an updated version of the on-demand
JPK_VAT Invoices Register Block, which is also known as JPK_FA. The most significant changes are
related to reverse charge and export transactions. The VAT Invoices program (R74P503) has been
modified according to the legislative changes. The XML tag FakturyWiersze.P_12 will now print "np" if
the transaction is exempt from tax and the tax amount is zero. Additionally, the FakturyWiersze.P_12
field has been updated to print "oo" for intercommunity transactions. The Faktura.P_4b and Faktura.
P_5b can now print both letters and numbers.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Portugal

Portugal - Include Payments Section 4.4 in Portugal SAFT Report [100 : 11-Apr-2023]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Portugal Localization system has been enhanced to include payment
details under section 4.4 in Portugal SAFT report. Customers can now use the SAFT report (R74L3001)
for printing payment details along with the invoices.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

SAFT-PT Layout changes 2017 [20 : 21-Jun-2018]


SAFT-PT is a standardized XML file used for exporting the accounting information of a company to the
tax authorities. The current structure is not sufficient to completely understand and control the
accounting information due to the flexibility in the use of accounts by different entities. It is necessary to
adjust the structure of the SAFT-PT file by creating taxonomies.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Legal Number Requirement for Shipping Documents [30 : 26-Jun-2018]


This feature enables users to extract information that can be submitted to the tax authorities to obtain
the AT identification code for transactions related to the shipping documents.

Note: Also available in releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Portugal - Reprint Shipping Documents with AT Doc Code ID [40 : 10-Sep-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 124 of 202
You can now reprint shipping documents that have AT identification codes. A new button, Print Shipping
Documents with ATDocCodeID, is available on the Work With Exported Transactions program
(P74L3002) that enables you to reprint transactions with ATDocCodeID.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Portugal - Spares Consumption Data Section 4.3 - SAFT [50 : 30-Oct-2018]


The Working Document section is added in the SAFT-PT Extractor report (R74L3001) to print the
working document details for the service work orders that are marked as payable and issued.
Note: Also available for release 9.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Address Lines, City, and Postal Code Printed as Unknown in Portugal SAFT File [60 : 20-Oct-
2021]
The fields for address lines, city, and postal code will be printed with the input, Desconhecido
(unknown), when these fields are left blank in the R74L3001 SAFT File.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Portugal- P74L921 Capability to Map Multiple G/L Accounts with the Same Referential Account
[70 : 09-May-2023]
The Portugal Accounts Mapping (P74L921) application is enhanced to enable the mapping of multiple
G/L accounts with the same referential account.
A referential account is a legal account, which is specified by the Portuguese government and can be
assigned to more than one business unit (G/L account).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2022

Portugal: Include ATCUD on Invoices and SAF-T [80 : 09-


May-2023]
According to the legal requirement introduced in Portugal, ATCUD code is required to be printed on the
invoices and other tax relevant documents. ATCUD is a concatenation of a validation code of the
document series provided by AT (Tax Authority) and the sequential number of the document within the
series. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Portugal Localization system has been enhanced to print the
ATCUD code on the invoice documents and SAF-T files.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2022

Portugal: Include QR Code on Invoices and Shipping Documents [90 : 19-Oct-2022]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 125 of 202
According to the Portuguese tax authority (AT), a QR code must be included in the invoices and other
tax-relevant documents. This measure aims to simplify the communication of invoices and better monitor
taxpayer transactions, thus combating the informal economy, fraud, and tax evasion. The JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Portugal Localization system has been enhanced to include the QR code information on
the invoices and shipping documents.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Spain

Online VAT (SII) - Invoice Registers [180 : 21-Jun-2018]


Starting 1 July 2017, VAT registers information has to be delivered to the Spanish tax authorities
electronically via a predefined XML format, and within 4 days after the issuance or reception date. This
will be accomplished by sending all invoice and ticket information to the tax authorities. It is applicable to
the following companies:
•Large companies with annual turnover above 6 million Euros
•Companies adhering to the monthly VAT settlement
•Company groups that declare as such
Other companies can adhere voluntarily.
All companies must submit the Issued Invoices Registers, Received Invoices Registers, Investment
Goods Register, and Selected Intra-Community Transactions Registers.

Technical specifications defining the electronic formats were released on 6 Dec 2016.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: •The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system creates the SII XML message for the taxpayer
required by the tax agency.
•The taxpayer is no longer required to deliver Modelo 340, Modelo 347, and Modelo 390.
•The taxpayer can inquire about all invoices sent to the tax authorities throughout the year.
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Online VAT (SII) – Investment Goods [190 : 21-Jun-2018]


The investment goods register must be followed only by those taxable persons who are subject to the
pro rata rule. This register must be submitted to the Tax Agency in the last period of the year or the last
period of activity (if it ceases), and the information collected in it is added to the registration of purchases
and sales of investment goods in the Received Invoices Register and in the Issued Invoices Register.

This register contains the following transactions:


•Invoice additions and modifications
•Invoice deletions
•Invoice inquiries

Note: This feature is also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 126 of 202
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Online VAT (SII) – Annual Tributary [200 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Annual Tributary register (formerly named Cash Collections register) must be submitted annually
with amounts over 6,000 Euros that have been received in cash from the same person or entity for
transactions performed during the calendar year.

Note: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Spain SII – Online VAT Registers – Modifications [210 : 21-Jun-2018]


The following enhancements are available to meet the requirements for the Spain online VAT registers:

•Generate the Spain SII Issued Invoice Register report (R74S600) and Received Invoice Register report
(R74S601) per the latest regulatory format.
•The issued invoice register and received invoice register should facilitate the export of transaction
details for the specific date range.
•Create two XML files for the Issued Invoice Register report (R74S600) and Received Invoice Register
report (R74S601) with two lines and different taxes.
•Display the correct invoice number in the Received Invoice Register report (R74S601).
•Sum up amounts in the Received Invoice Register report (R74S601) with only one tax rate.
•Print the below additional fields in the Issued Invoice Register report (R74S600):
a) ImportePorArticulos7_14_Otros
b) ImporteTAIReglasLocalizacion

Note: These enhancements are also available in releases 9.1 and 9.0.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Spain – Received Invoice Register Updates [220 : 18-Dec-2018]


You can use the new Vouchers Related to Debit Note/Credit Note program (P700401) to provide original
document details and associate that with the debit note or credit note.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Spain – Simplified Invoice Identification [230 : 18-Dec-2018]


For simplified invoice type identification, you must enter S in the special handling column of the Invoice
Type – Doc Type UDC (74S/IT) and Rec. Doc Type – Invoice Type UDC (74S/DI).

Note: Also available for release 9.1.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 127 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Spain - Issued Invoice Registers Updates [240 : 13-Feb-2019]


You can use the new Related Invoices for CN/DN program (P7430016) to provide original document
details for a debit note or credit note and associate that with a debit note or credit note.

Note: Also available for release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

Switzerland

Switzerland - ESR Payments XML Upload [30 : 16-Sep-2018]


The PostFinance bank sends you electronic media in XML format that confirms the payments credited to
you. You use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne solution to import the XML format of the ESR payment
information and upload it to F03B13Z1.

Note: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Taiwan

e-GUI for invoices and vouchers in Taiwan [90 : 10-Dec-2019]


According to a regulation announced by the Taiwan Tax Authority, the Electronic Government Uniform
Invoice (e-GUI) number will replace the current Computer Government Uniform Invoice (c-GUI) number.
The e-GUI number is unique to each invoice and is generated by the Taiwan Tax Authority. Adhering to
this regulation is mandatory for all newly registered Taiwan business enterprises. A feature has been
introduced to extract the sales and accounts receivable invoice information. This information is
submitted to the Taiwan Tax Authority to generate the e-GUI number. The feature also enables the user
to update the e-GUI number received from the tax authority for the invoice or credit memo on the JD
Edwards platform. New features to extract AP GUI Tax Filing Data and update e-GUI information for AP
transactions are also added for Taiwan.
Note: Also available for Release 9.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

United Kingdom

Construction Industry Scheme (CIS) Amendments [60 : 21-Jun-2018]


United Kingdom HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) requires all amendments for the CIS Monthly
Return file to be submitted electronically. The CIS Monthly Return Amendment program enables you to
make amendments to the file and resubmit the CIS Monthly Return report.
Change: Added in Release 9.2

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 128 of 202
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: •All amendments can be submitted electronically, without the need for making amendments
via telephone.
•Contractors can amend the CIS Monthly Return file and resubmit it to HMRC.
•Users can view amendments online.
•Users can retain a copy and version history of the file for audit and reconciliation purposes.
Notes: Also available for release 9.1

EORI Number for EU Customers [70 : 19-Feb-2021]


Post-Brexit, all UK businesses importing or exporting goods from or to the EU need an EORI (Economic
Operators Registration and Identification) number. This number is required as an identification number
in all customs procedures when businesses exchange information with the customs authorities. The JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne Localization for United Kingdom system has been enhanced to support the use
and storage of the EORI number.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of February 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

New Processing Option AAI Item Number Added to Calculate Withholding - UK Report
(R74U04580) [80 : 21-Oct-2021]
A new field AAI Item Number has been added to the processing option in the Calculate Withholding - UK
report (R74U04580). This enables you to configure multiple accounts for different companies in the
Work with Automatic Accounting Instructions program (P0012).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of May 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

United States

UPDATE PSD CODES USING P070920B [10 : 24-Jun-2021]


Request that changes and corrections are allowed to be made to PSD codes within the 'Work with Tax
History (PA ACT32) application (P070920B) and that these changes be written to the corresponding
tables.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil

Brazil - NFe New Contingency Environment SVC [370 : 08-Apr-2015]


Technical Note 2013/007 presents a new contingency system for NF-e authorization called "SVC -
SEFAZ VIRTUAL CONTINGENCY".
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Available for past releases: 8.12, 9.0, 9.1

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 129 of 202
Brazil - Withholding Taxes Services [380 : 08-Apr-2015]
When generating Nota Fiscal for services sold in Brazil with split payments the system will be able to
split the withholding amount for PIS, COFINS and CSLL taxes accordingly.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Available for past releases: 9.0

Brazil - SPED Contabil - New Layout 2 [390 : 18-Apr-2015]


The Federal Revenue Agency of Brazil - RFB released the Layout 2 - Version 3.0.1 of the Digital
Accounting Bookkeeping - ECD. The new SPED Contabil 3.0.1 version is available in JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne releases 9.0 and 9.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Notes: Available for past releases: 9.0, 9.1

Brazil NFe XML Layout Change 3.10 [400 : 18-Apr-2015]


The Brazilian Fiscal Authority released the new version of the NFe (National Electronic Invoice) XML
legal layout. Changes for the 3.1 XML Layout Version include new fields, validation rules, and XML
layout in general.
Also NFC-e (Electronic Invoice of sale to the end consumer - Model 65) is included in the modifications
so companies can process them using the software and report information on end-consumer transaction
to the fiscal authority.
The contingency method DPEC is replaced with the EPEC contingency for version 3.1 and new
contingency methods are available for NFC-e (FS and Offline).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Benefits: Ability to generate, transmit and print fiscal notes for end-consumer transactions (NFC-e)
and use contingency transmission methods if the normal process is unavailable.
Reduce system setup and maintenance by enabling the system to dynamically generate the proper
fiscal note type (National or NFC-e) according to the characteristics of the transaction.
Increase the accuracy when calculating taxes by including additional details in the information included
in your NF-e XML files.
Provide specific people in your network with the ability to access and download the transaction
information you report to SEFAZ.
Notes: Available for past releases: 9.0. 9.1

Brazil SPED Accounting - 2015 Changes (Cotepe 3.1.7) [410 : 24-Jul-2015]


Companies in Brazil are required to build a text file from their accounting systems with information about
transactions that occurred in the previous calendar year. This text file is uploaded to the Sped Contabil,
a government system provided by Brazilian Federal Tax Authority, and then transmitted through the
Internet to the Brazilian Federal Tax Authority database. The process for reporting this information is
referred to as SPED (Sistema Publico de escrituracao Digital [Public System of Digital Accounting])
accounting.

The 3.1.7 version of Digital Bookkeeping (ECD) has recently been published and introduced changes to

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 130 of 202
the requirements:
- You can now specify the ECD of the company and add SCP identification information.
- Fields were added to existing registers 0000 and 0035
- Obsolete fields were removed
- New registers were included: 0035 (SCP Identification), I053 (Related Accounts), and J935 (Auditors).
- You can set up associations between main accounts and related accounts for reporting purposes
- You can generate the SPED book type S (SCP book).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2015)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)

E1 Brazil - NF-e 3.10 Specific situations update (version 2.02) [420 : 11-May-2023]
The Brazil Government announced specification for ICMS deferred and also other fields, such as Import
declaration information. Depending on the fiscal note other specific fields will need to be populated with
another information. You can use JD Edwards Localizations for Brazil to calculate Deferred ICMS for
your qualifying transactions (on outbound and stand-alone fiscal notes) and include this information in
the XML reports that you submit to the authorities.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: Also available for release 9.0.

Brazil NT 2015-002 v 1.00 - NFe e NFC-e - Technical Note Update [430 : 11-May-2023]
A new technical note of the Electronic Invoice v3.01, known in Brazil as "Nota Fiscal Eletronica or NF-e"
was published. It establishes new fiscal rules, new validation rules and some layout modifications,
impacting the NF-e (business to business invoices) and NFC-e (business to consumer invoices).

The Contingencies Setup program enables you to specify whether a change from one emission type for
a fiscal note or consumer fiscal note to another emission type is allowed in the system.

A processing option is added to enable you to specify whether a payment is integrated into the
company's automation system.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.0

Voucher Match Automation [460 : 21-Jun-2018]


To enable users in Brazil to use voucher match automation, country-specific data are loaded into F0411
tag tables to generate a valid and legal voucher according to Brazilian law. The system performs Brazil
specific validations, for example correct status of the Nota Fiscal.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for release 9.1.

LOC Brazil - Amendment 87 [470 : 21-Jun-2018]


The EnterpriseOne solution Release 9.1 and 9.2 complies with the Brazil Amendment 87 changes

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 131 of 202
published in Brazil - Technical Note 2015-003 and 2015-003 v 1.10 (January 5, 2016).
Amendment 87 deals with various issues related to the NF-e. Technical Note 2015/003 establishes new
fiscal rules, new validation rules, and some layout modifications that impact the NF-e invoices.

The legal changes include:


- NF-e changes: New rules for distribution of ICMS DIFAL tax revenues to the participating states in
certain circumstances.
- New fields to control the ICMS Fund for Combating and Eradicating Poverty (FECOP).
- IPI Legal Framing Code: New SEFAZ-defined IPI Framing Code values to be used in the NF-e.
- Tax Substitution Code (CEST): Allows identificationying of the goods eventually subjected to the tax
substitution regime or to the tax collection anticipation concerning subsequent operations.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: Distribution
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1

Localized Mailing Tab in the Address Book for Brazilian Customers [480 : 27-Oct-2016]
This feature enables users to specify a non-Brazilian address to be used for Nota Fiscal.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

NFe - Email Response Capability [490 : 21-Jun-2018]


You can send email notifications and NFe to your customer safter the Government has approved or
cancelled the NFe.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

BSSV - Static URL [500 : 21-Jun-2018]


Brazil has several United Federations (UF). Each federation has different URL access. The customer
needs to be able to create soft coding records for each federation based on the UF code and not based
on user/role/environment. The respective URL will be consumed by the JDE BSSV JC76B001 - NFe Lot
processing based on soft coding set up done for the UF.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - DANFE Updates [510 : 21-Jun-2018]


The DANFE format is updated to current specifications per 'Manual_Integracao_Contribuinte_4.01-
NT2009.006'.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Planned Type: Industry:
Notes: Also available for releases 9.1 and 9.0.

NFe Email Response Capability [520 : 21-Jun-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 132 of 202
EnterpriseOne provides the capability to send e-mail to the NFe customer after the government has
approved or cancelled NFe.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil Accounting (Contabil) SPED Layout 5 [530 : 21-Jun-2018]


Companies in Brazil are required to build a text file from their accounting systems with information about
transactions that occurred in the last calendar year. This text file is uploaded to the Sped Contabil, a
government system provided by Brazilian Federal Tax Authority, and then transmitted through the
Internet to the Brazilian Federal Tax Authority database. The process for reporting this information is
referred to as SPED (Sistema Publico de escrituracao Digital [Public System of Digital Accounting])
accounting.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: Also available for releases 9.0 and 9.1.

Brazil - NF-e XML Layout 4.0 Update [540 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Brazilian Fiscal Authority have published changes to the NF-e (National Electronic Invoice). The
legal 4.0 version is effective from August 1, 2017.

Note: The updates are also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: The updates are also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.

Brazil Correction Letter (CC-E) [550 : 21-Jun-2018]


An electronic correction letter (CC-e) is an NF-e event that informs the government and NF-e recipients
about incorrect information contained in an NF-e already authorized by the government. This feature
provides the Electronic Correction Letter (CCe) for the NF-e supplier and vendor.

Note: This feature is also available for Release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil NFe XML Layout 4.0, Group I and K [560 : 21-Jun-2018]


The Brazil Fiscal Authority published changes to the NFe Electronic Invoice. The legal effective date is
August 2017.

Note: This feature is also available for Release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil Digital Signature in XML file, Electronic Nota Fiscal [570 : 21-Jun-2018]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 133 of 202
The Electronic Nota Fiscal generated by the NF-e Info Generation by Lot (R76B561L) application will
include the Digital Signature as required by SEFAZ.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - Technical Note NT2016_1.30, NT2016_1.41, and NT2016_1.42 [580 : 27-Jul-2018]


Brazil NT2016_1.30, NT2016_1.41, and NT2016_1.42 include exclusion of the clEnq field, additional
validations, and information that do not interfere with the layout.

Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil - NFe XML Tags for Outbound NFe [590 : 08-Aug-2018]


R76B561/R76B561L inserts incorrect tags values in the Nota Fiscal XML when the XML contains more
than one Nota Fiscal and supports direct export tags.

Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil PIS-COFINS Taxes Booked to Different Accounts [600 : 10-Jul-2018]


You can now distribute and apply PIS/COFINS for the same fiscal company in different accounts.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil - TECHNICAL NOTE 2016_002 V1.50 and End Consumer Nota Fiscal [610 : 22-Aug-2018]
Brazil NFe update is specified in the Technical Note 016_002 V1.50 and modify tags for End Consumer
Nota Fiscal with Model Type 55.

Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.

Change: Added in Release 9.2


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil Nota Fiscal Technical Note 2016_002 Version 1.60 [620 : 25-Jan-2019]
Brazil NFe update specified in the Technical Note 2016_002 version 1.60.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Brazil NFe 4.0 ICMS-ST Update [630 : 25-Jan-2019]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 134 of 202
Each Brazilian state controls its own ICMS legislation. Rates, rules, and regulations vary from state to
state. The current requirement is to enhance R76B561/R76B561L to support Substitution taxes and to
fill XML with N27d `vFCPSTRet and related tags for CST 60.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Anexo IV Do Cadastro Fiscal Nota Informare [640 : 01-Oct-2019]


Now you can enter your tax information while creating a Sales Order to print the tax information in the
field IE (E17) in XML as per Anexo IV Do Cadastro Fiscal Nota Informare - Alterado o Anexo IV pelo
Decreto nº 14.644, de 30.12.2016, when you process a sale nota fiscal.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Withholding Taxes Calculation for Foreign Vendors in Brazil [650 : 15-Sep-2020]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system has been updated to calculate the withholding taxes applicable
for foreign vendors in Brazil. This functionality addresses the new regulatory requirement in Brazil to
calculate the withholdings of IR, INSS, and ISS taxes for foreign vendors.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - Concessionaires Bar Code Entry to Process 48-Digit Bar Code [660 : 20-Oct-2021]
The Voucher Additional Information – Brazil program (P76B04BC) has been updated to enable users to
enter Concessionaires bar code information on the Work with Voucher Code – Brazil form. The
P76B04BC program has a new processing option that can be used to specify whether the Boletos or
Concessionaires bar code information is displayed for users to enter or scan the bar code for inbound
transactions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of May 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - New Customer Number Field in IPI Legal Framing Program [670 : 20-Oct-2021]
The IPI Legal Framing program (P7613B) has been updated to enable users to add the customer
number when setting up IPI legal framing codes. This change enables users to create multiple IPI legal
framing codes with the same Transaction Nature, Transaction Suffix, and IPI Tax Situation codes but for
different customers.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of May 2021)
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - New Tax ID Validation for Distrito Federal [680 : 28-May-2021]


The tax id validation for the Distrito Federal district in Brazil has been updated to enable you to use 08
as the second digit in the 13-digit new tax id. This update ensures compliance with the Federal District
State Government State Registration Critical Screenplay.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 135 of 202
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil - ICMS Substitution Tax Benefits for Suppliers Registered as Simple Tax Payers [690 : 20-
Oct-2021]
JD Edwards supports substitution taxes for suppliers registered as Simple Tax Payers to avail tax
benefits. This enables the Simple Tax Payers to have ICMS negated from the ICMS substitution tax
amount.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

New Calculation Basis for PIS and COFINS Taxes [700 : 18-Nov-2021]
Brazilian legislation Extraordinary Appeal (RE) 574706 and Opinion SEI No.7698/2021/ME has
implemented the new calculation basis to be applied for PIS and COFINS taxes for nota fiscal
documents produced in the country.

New calculation basis for COFINS Tax = (Total value of goods) - (ICMS tax value)
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil Nota Fiscal XML Update for 2021 [710 : 09-May-2023]


The Brazilian tax authority released a new technical note which changes the XML layout for the legal
invoice. The new XML layout specifies whether or not PIS and COFINS substitution values comprise the
total NF-e value. The JD Edwards system has been updated to incorporate these changes.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Provision to Contribute to Social Security Cost for Services [720 : 09-May-2023]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tax Calculation ISS, INSS, FUNRURAL - BR - 04 program (R76B4310)
is updated to aggregate INSS tax to the INSS-based account instead of the RNV account for a three-
way voucher generated from a purchase order with B line type. This enhancement is for vouchers with
associated purchase orders and corresponding Purchase Order Receiver file (F43121). Standard
vouchers are not affected by this enhancement.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2022

Brazil-Option in Outbound and Inbound Programs to Include or Exclude ICMS in PIS/COFINS


[730 : 19-Oct-2022]
The Brazilian tax authority now allows the user to decide whether or not to include ICMS substitution in
PIS and COFINS. JD Edwards will not require the user to always exclude ICMS from PIS and COFINS
in accordance with the article of Brazil on Substitution taxes. The outbound and inbound programs now
provide an additional processing option to allow the user to include or exclude ICMS for PIS/COFINS

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 136 of 202
calculation.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry:

Brazil Nota Fiscal 2022 XML Update - NT2020.006 1.30 [740 : 18-Jan-2023]
The Brazilian tax authority (SEFAZ) has announced changes to the format of the NF-e electronic fiscal
note, the document used to sell or purchase goods.

•The changes are made to improve the methods used to identify intermediaries. A sale can occur even
when the customer is not physically present. Instead, a digital platform or marketplace can serve as an
intermediary for the transaction. In these scenarios, the XML for the electronic fiscal document models
55 and 65 (NF-e and NFC-e) that is issued for the sale must contain a new tag to indicate that an
intermediary participated in the operation and its details in the child tags.
•Inclusion of rule YA06-10 ensures the credit or debit card brand codes published on the national portal
is recorded in JDE and printed in tBand.
•Inclusion of rule YA02-50 ensures that the payment method codes published on the national portal are
recorded in JDE and printed in tPag.
•Inclusion of rule YA02c-10 checks if the payment code (tag:tPag) is filled with the code 99-Others. It is
mandatory to fill in the payment method description (tag: xPag), when the payment code (tag:tPag) is
filled with the code 99-Others.
•Inclusion of rule YA02c-20 checks when the payment code (tag:tPag) is different from 99-Others (tag:
tpag 99). It is prohibited to fill in the payment method description (tag: xPag), when the payment code
(tag:tPag) is different from 99-Others.
•Fixed rule description YB01-20 validates the Broker Indicator. The system prints the Intermediary
Information in the respective tags when the Intermediary Indicator is available.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Localization Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 137 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone Applications


Mobile Expense Management

Mobile Menu Application [30 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile applications for Sales Inquiry, RSS Approvals, Purchase Order
Approvals, and Expense Management can currently be accessed via an icon on your smart phone's
desktop. Users that access more than one of these applications will have multiple icons on their mobile
device and will need to sign in to each application separately. This enhancement will enable users to
have a single icon on their mobile desktop that will take them to the sign on application. Once signed in,
a menu of the mobile applications they are authorized to use will be displayed. This enhancement will
greatly simplify the use of multiple mobile applications.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Adopt JAX WS Standards for Mobile Applications [40 : 11-May-2023]


All mobile applications have been enabled to work with business services that have been built with JAX
RPC or JAX WS standards. Beginning with Tools Release 9.1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be
supporting the JAX WS standards and this project provides the choice for our customers. Information
on this and what it means to you can be found in a white paper on My Oracle Support - Understanding
the Impact of JAX-WS (ID 1488986.1).

With JAX WS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is able to take advantage of the native features
available on your mobile device, such as the camera or photo gallery, and to work with attachments
available within EnterpriseOne. Another enhancement is to allow Mobile Expense Management to use
the camera or photo gallery on your mobile device to upload photos as attachments, such as receipts, to
your expense reports. This feature will only be available when using the Mobile Expense Management
business services that have been built using JAX WS.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 138 of 202
Mobile Purchase Order Approval

Mobile Menu Application [30 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile applications for Sales Inquiry, RSS Approvals, Purchase Order
Approvals, and Expense Management can currently be accessed via an icon on your smart phone's
desktop. Users that access more than one of these applications will have multiple icons on their mobile
device and will need to sign in to each application separately. This enhancement will enable users to
have a single icon on their mobile desktop that will take them to the sign on application. Once signed in,
a menu of the mobile applications they are authorized to use will be displayed. This enhancement will
greatly simplify the use of multiple mobile applications.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Adopt JAX WS Standards for Mobile Applications [40 : 11-May-2023]


All mobile applications have been enabled to work with business services that have been built with JAX
RPC or JAX WS standards. Beginning with Tools Release 9.1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be
supporting the JAX WS standards and this project provides the choice for our customers. Information
on this and what it means to you can be found in a white paper on My Oracle Support - Understanding
the Impact of JAX-WS (ID 1488986.1).

With JAX WS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is able to take advantage of the native features
available on your mobile device, such as the camera or photo gallery, and to work with attachments
available within EnterpriseOne. Another enhancement is to allow Mobile Expense Management to use
the camera or photo gallery on your mobile device to upload photos as attachments, such as receipts, to
your expense reports. This feature will only be available when using the Mobile Expense Management
business services that have been built using JAX WS.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Mobile Requisition Self-Service Approval

Mobile Menu Application [30 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile applications for Sales Inquiry, RSS Approvals, Purchase Order
Approvals, and Expense Management can currently be accessed via an icon on your smart phone's
desktop. Users that access more than one of these applications will have multiple icons on their mobile
device and will need to sign in to each application separately. This enhancement will enable users to
have a single icon on their mobile desktop that will take them to the sign on application. Once signed in,
a menu of the mobile applications they are authorized to use will be displayed. This enhancement will
greatly simplify the use of multiple mobile applications.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 139 of 202
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Adopt JAX WS Standards for Mobile Applications [40 : 11-May-2023]


All mobile applications have been enabled to work with business services that have been built with JAX
RPC or JAX WS standards. Beginning with Tools Release 9.1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be
supporting the JAX WS standards and this project provides the choice for our customers. Information
on this and what it means to you can be found in a white paper on My Oracle Support - Understanding
the Impact of JAX-WS (ID 1488986.1).

With JAX WS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is able to take advantage of the native features
available on your mobile device, such as the camera or photo gallery, and to work with attachments
available within EnterpriseOne. Another enhancement is to allow Mobile Expense Management to use
the camera or photo gallery on your mobile device to upload photos as attachments, such as receipts, to
your expense reports. This feature will only be available when using the Mobile Expense Management
business services that have been built using JAX WS.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Mobile Sales Inquiry

Mobile Menu Application [30 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile applications for Sales Inquiry, RSS Approvals, Purchase Order
Approvals, and Expense Management can currently be accessed via an icon on your smart phone's
desktop. Users that access more than one of these applications will have multiple icons on their mobile
device and will need to sign in to each application separately. This enhancement will enable users to
have a single icon on their mobile desktop that will take them to the sign on application. Once signed in,
a menu of the mobile applications they are authorized to use will be displayed. This enhancement will
greatly simplify the use of multiple mobile applications.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Adopt JAX WS Standards for Mobile Applications [40 : 11-May-2023]


All mobile applications have been enabled to work with business services that have been built with JAX
RPC or JAX WS standards. Beginning with Tools Release 9.1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be
supporting the JAX WS standards and this project provides the choice for our customers. Information
on this and what it means to you can be found in a white paper on My Oracle Support - Understanding
the Impact of JAX-WS (ID 1488986.1).

With JAX WS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is able to take advantage of the native features
available on your mobile device, such as the camera or photo gallery, and to work with attachments
available within EnterpriseOne. Another enhancement is to allow Mobile Expense Management to use
the camera or photo gallery on your mobile device to upload photos as attachments, such as receipts, to
your expense reports. This feature will only be available when using the Mobile Expense Management

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 140 of 202
business services that have been built using JAX WS.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Mobile Service Time Entry

Mobile Service Time Entry [10 : 11-May-2023]


Provide a time entry application for the smart phone for entering time related to working on a work order.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - Enable our customers to perform business critical tasks while working in the field.
- Technicians that work on equipment in the field will be able to enter their time for a work order using
their smart phone.
- They will be able to add, edit* or delete* time entry information for a specific day (*unposted records
only).
- They will be able to search for existing time entry records by date or by work order number.
- Any customer performing maintenance on equipment out in the field, such as servicing a fleet, or
servicing customer's equipment on site.
- Based on P311221
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Mobile - Menu Application [20 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile applications for Sales Inquiry, RSS Approvals, Purchase Order
Approvals, and Expense Management can currently be accessed via an icon on your smart phone's
desktop. Users that access more than one of these applications will have multiple icons on their mobile
device and will need to sign in to each application separately. This enhancement will enable users to
have a single icon on their mobile desktop that will take them to the sign on application. Once signed in,
a menu of the mobile applications they are authorized to use will be displayed. This enhancement will
greatly simplify the use of multiple mobile applications.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Adopt JAX WS Standards for Mobile Applications [30 : 11-May-2023]


All mobile applications have been enabled to work with business services that have been built with JAX
RPC or JAX WS standards. Beginning with Tools Release 9.1.2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be
supporting the JAX WS standards and this project provides the choice for our customers. Information
on this and what it means to you can be found in a white paper on My Oracle Support - Understanding
the Impact of JAX-WS (ID 1488986.1).

With JAX WS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is able to take advantage of the native features

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 141 of 202
available on your mobile device, such as the camera or photo gallery, and to work with attachments
available within EnterpriseOne. Another enhancement is to allow Mobile Expense Management to use
the camera or photo gallery on your mobile device to upload photos as attachments, such as receipts, to
your expense reports. This feature will only be available when using the Mobile Expense Management
business services that have been built using JAX WS.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: As of Applications 9.2, Mobile ADF Browser smartphone applications are no longer supported.
Upgrade to 9.1 or greater for equivalent mobile solutions. See My Oracle Support Doc ID 2046566.1.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 142 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

User Experience
Cross-Applications

Industry Showcase for User Defined Objects [10 : 12-Jan-2017]


JD Edwards provides a dynamic user experience in the area of user defined objects (Café One,
Enterprise Pages, One View Watchlists, Advanced Queries, Custom Grid Layouts). By delivering
content for user defined objects (UDOs) based on industry, JD Edwards showcases each industry and
provides valuable content and examples for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne users. The UDOs are grouped
by personas, such as the Maintenance Technician persona in the Natural Resources industry. You can
associate the UDOs with roles for the personas to enable user access to the UDOs.

Showcasing the personas are the Active Content Pages. These EnterpriseOne Pages utilize the Oracle
JavaScript Extension Toolkit (JET) to enable users to visualize their data in order to see at first glance
how their farm/field, maintenance area or homebuilders are performing.

UDOs for the following personas are available:


•Maintenance Technician and Maintenance Scheduler in the Natural Resources industry
•Farm Manager and Field Manager in the Agribusiness industry
•Lot Start Coordinator for the Homebuilder industry
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2016)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Preconfigured Notifications [130 : 10-Apr-2018]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for much of the EnterpriseOne suite of
products. This content is available for several key roles, business processes, and modules within
EnterpriseOne. Your users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification
designers can personalize them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for
notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 143 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Additional Preconfigured Notification Content [150 : 19-Feb-2019]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered additional notification content for the EnterpriseOne suite of
products. This content is available for several key roles, business processes, and modules within
EnterpriseOne. Your users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification
designers can personalize them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for
notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

UX One: Alert, Analyze, Act Role-Based Pages [20 : 14-Nov-2016]


JD Edwards UX One Roles are the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user
experience centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

JD Edwards UX One includes a set of role-based solutions available across the broad portfolio of JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne products, including:
- Asset Lifecycle Management
- Customer Relationship Management
- Financial Management
- Order Management
- Supply Chain
- Supply Management
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

UX One Chart Navigation [50 : 10-Oct-2017]


The UX One chart navigation functionality enables users with specific roles to navigate from a chart on a
UX One page to the application on which the chart is based. Users can drill down into specific data
presented in the charts to further analyze or investigate the data on the charts.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 144 of 202
The navigation functionality is available for some of the charts for the following roles:
- Accounts Receivable Manager
- Benefits Manager
- Customer Service Manager
- Customer Service Representative
- Field Service Manager
- Maintenance Manager
- Payroll Manager
- Pricing Operations Manager
- Procurement Manager
- Project Manager
- Property Manager
- Safety Manager
- Service Operations Manager
- Strategic Buyer
- Warehouse Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

UX One Chart Updates [60 : 16-Oct-2017]


The usability of UX One analytic components has been enhanced so that users can now view the AIS
cache refresh interval set up by administrators.

Additionally, the UX One pages have been enhanced with context menus on some of the charts, which
enable users to navigate to related applications from the charts.

The chart context menu navigation is available for the following roles:
- Accounts Payable Manager
- Accounts Receivable Manager
- Asset Manager
- Collection Manager
- Customer Service Manager
- Customer Service Representative
- Field Service Manager
- Field Service Supervisor
- Fulfillment Manager
- General Accounting Manager
- Human Resources Manager
- Inventory Accounting Manager
- Inventory Control Manager
- Maintenance Manager
- Maintenance Scheduler
- Operations Manager
- Payroll Manager
- Procurement Agreement Manager
- Procurement Manager
- Procurement Pricing Operations Manager
- Project Manager
- Property Manager
- Rental Operations Manager
- Safety Manager
- Sales Agreement Manager
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 145 of 202
- Service Agent Manager
- Strategic Pricing Manager
- VMI Account Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Process Simplification for Production Execution [70 : 05-Oct-2021]


The production process can include many manual touchpoints and communication between many roles
before an item is produced. This feature provides new tools that you can use to simplify and streamline
the execution of the production process. This includes a work order rescheduling program that presents
all scheduled operations along with the available capacity at every work center required to complete the
order, graphically in a Gantt-style bar chart. Remaining capacity is displayed for each day in either a
green or red bar, with a red bar indicating an overcapacity condition. Dragging and dropping any
operation to a new date will trigger an update to the work order requested date and rescheduling of the
parts list and routing accordingly, with the results of any change made immediately visible.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: • Automation of communication between roles
• Timely, optionally offline notifications of exception conditions and/or required action
• Improved user experience
Examples: • Parts list and routing attached automatically when the work order is created (manually or
from MRP message)
• Complete graphical display of work order operations along with work center capacity
• Drag-and-drop of operations and work order scheduling
• Unexpected shortage triggers cycle count and notifications
• Warning notifications when operational yield is lower than expected
• Notifications of test/inspection failures awaiting disposition

UX One Chart Navigation - Additional Roles [80 : 16-Oct-2017]


The UX One chart navigation functionality enables users with specific roles to navigate from a chart on a
UX One page to the application on which the chart is based. Users can drill down to specific data
presented in the charts to further analyze or investigate the data on the charts.

The navigation functionality is now available for the following additional roles:
- Accounts Payable Manager
- Asset Manager
- Collection Manager
- Crop Manager
- Field Manager
- Field Service Supervisor
- Fulfillment Manager
- General Accounting Manager
- Grower Contract Manager
- Human Resources Manager
- Inventory Accounting Manager
- Inventory Control Manager

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 146 of 202
- Maintenance Scheduler
- Maintenance Technician
- Operations Manager
- Procurement Agreement Manager
- Procurement Pricing Operations Manager
- Rental Operations Manager
- Sales Agreement Manager
- Service Agent Manager
- Service Contract Manager
- Strategic Pricing Manager
- VMI Account Manager
- Winemaker
- Wine Cellar Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 147 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Financial Management
Financials

Alternate Tax Rate/Area Assignment [10 : 11-May-2023]


The assignment of a Tax Rate/Area to an Invoice, Sales Order, Voucher, or Purchase Order has been
based upon the value provided in the Business Unit, Customer, or Supplier master. In the European
Union, tax rates are different based upon the type of transaction as well as the origin and destination
countries. This enhancement allows for an alternate method of assigning the Tax Rate/Area. This
method is optional and can be turned on for specific companies as well as countries.

With this method, Tax Rate/Areas can be assigned based upon:

•Company
•Ship from and Ship to countries of the transaction
•Type of transaction – Sale or Purchase
•Specific customer or supplier

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: Improved Flexibility for Tax Rate/Area Assignment to Transactions

Improve Tax Calculation Accuracy


•Assign Tax Rate/Areas to transactions based upon additional criteria
•Setup Tax Rate/Area assignment criteria based upon your taxing
authority requirements
•Support for domestic and inter-community transactions

Simplify Transaction Entry


•Transaction identified as domestic or inter-community automatically
•Manual overrides no longer needed for inter-community transactions
•Available for Invoices, Sales Orders, Vouchers, and Purchase Orders

Flexible Setup
•Use base product method or alternate method by company
•Setup defaults for countries or specific countries, company, customer,

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 148 of 202
and/or supplier
•Flexible error handling allows you to ensure your setup is correct

Financial Year-End 2020 - E1 1099 Update [110 : 10-May-2021]


The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) has released a new 1099 Nonemployee Compensation (NEC) form
for the tax year 2020. The nonemployee compensation amounts and information will move from the
1099-MISC form to the new separate form 1099-NEC that will be required to file taxes for the tax year
2020, due in 2021. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financial Management System has been enhanced
to provide the new form, and adjustments have been made to the 1099 process for 2020 in accordance
with the IRS requirements. This feature enables our customers to adopt the new form and abide by the
new regulations mandated by the IRS.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Expanded Real-Time Event for Address Book Who's Who [120 : 25-May-2021]
Whenever updates are made to an Address Book Who's Who record, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Address Book triggers real-time event notifications to an external system to keep the Who's Who data in
sync. This real-time event has been expanded to include all "Who's Who" columns. This enhancement
not only enables our customers to automatically sync Address Book Who's Who information to an
external system but also eliminates duplicate data entry and other data entry problems that could be
caused by having to manually enter data into separate systems.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Improvements to Fully Capture Model Journal Entry Information When Tracking Taxes by Pay
Item [130 : 25-May-2021]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable processes have been
enhanced to fully capture the model journal entry information such as Subledger, Remark and Cost
Object, and so on when Invoice and Voucher Company Tax Constant is set to track taxes by pay item.
This enhancement fully leverages the model journal entry feature eliminating the need for manual date
entry of the G/L distribution.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Increased Flexibility For Managing Voided Vouchers in Duplicate Invoice Number Validation [140
: 13-Oct-2021]
To provide increased control over processing of vouchers and to help maintain data integrity, JD
Edwards has added a processing option to allow voided vouchers to be included in the duplicate invoice
number validation. This processing option specifies whether the system generates a warning, an error,
or no message when it finds a duplicate invoice number in a voided voucher.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Data Security for Bank Account Numbers [150 : 09-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 149 of 202
Accounting and payroll managers now have the ability to visually mask bank account numbers in the JD
Edwards system to prevent unauthorized access to this highly sensitive information. This capability
supports NACHA requirements aimed at protecting bank account information for ACH and IAT payment
formats.

To download the relevant Electronic Software Updates (ESUs) pertaining to this feature, refer to this
document on My Oracle Support:
https://mosemp.us.oracle.com/epmos/faces/DocumentDisplay?id=2790533.1
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Automatic Table Cache Refresh [20 : 11-May-2023]


This new enhancement provides for the automatic clearing of certain table caches when updates occur.
This will enable data to be changed and made available to users without the downtime previously
associated with this process.

Many applications that update data in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will be modified to enable this
automatic clearing of the table cache. An example of this type of application is the Company Constants
(P0010)application.

Table caching is a feature within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne that improves the performance of many
applications. This is done by caching tables that are necessary for many processes to limit the number
of data base operations. These tables contain setup data such as constants and master tables. The
main characteristic of cached tables is that the data in these tables does not change on a regular basis.

One limitation of table caching is that if data is updated, users do not have immediate access to the new
information.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Enable data to be changed and made available to users without the downtime previously
associated with this process.
Examples: An example of the use of this new feature is the period close process. As each company
closes its period the new period information can be made immediately available to the users by clearing
the cache when the application (Company Constants P0010) is closed. Users will no longer need to sign
out and back in as each company changes their current period.
Notes: Requires JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9.1.2

New Workflow to Approve Changes in Bank Account Details [290 : 11-Apr-2023]


With this enhancement, a workflow is introduced to approve the changes made to the bank account
details. The changes will be updated only when approved by the approver.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 150 of 202
Ability to View Details of Vouchers of Purchase Orders from Account Ledger Program [300 : 06-
Dec-2023]
The Account ledger program now has the ability to drill down to voucher match reversal for a voucher
associated with a purchase order based on the business needs. With this enhancement, the Account
ledger program also provides the ability to drill down to the details of a voucher that is associated with a
purchase order.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Flexibility in Defining the Default Document Type for Journal Entry [310 : 06-Dec-2023]
The Journal Entry program has been enhanced with a processing option to specify the default document
type for Journal entries.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Tax Processing - Extending Tax ID Validation Bypass Functionality to All Countries [40 : 22-Aug-
2018]
The tax ID, which is validated in the Address Book, can be bypassed for specific countries. This
functionality is now extended to all countries.

Note: Also available for 9.1 and 9.0 releases.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

User Configured Required Bank Account Numbers in Bank Accounts by Address (P0030A) [50 :
26-May-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system is updated to remove the requirement of Customer Bank
Account Number (CBNK) as a mandatory field in the Bank Account by Address (P0030A) application.
Two new personal forms are added to provide customization of the P0030A application for US and
SEPA accounts.
Note: Also available for 9.1 release.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This feature update improves the usability of the P0030A application. You can now create
personalized forms to meet your requirement. It prevents the need for any localization.

Currency Codes Update to ISO Standards [60 : 22-Mar-2019]


As many of JD Edwards customers do business globally, they work with customers, suppliers,
employees, and internal entities from many different countries. When performing transactions with them
they may also be transacting in many different currencies. This enhancement has updated the currency
codes within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to include all currencies based upon ISO standards. Previously

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 151 of 202
customers would need to manually add these new currencies to EnterpriseOne.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Country Codes Update to ISO Standards [70 : 25-May-2021]


As many of JD Edwards customers do business globally, they work with customers, suppliers,
employees, and internal entities from many different countries. This enhancement has updated the
country codes within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to include all countries based upon ISO standards.
Previously customers would need to manually add these new countries to EnterpriseOne.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Optionally Calculating Discounts on Credit Memos [80 : 11-Oct-2022]


Currently, payment terms that can generate discounts get applied to credit memos just as they do to
standard invoices From a business perspective, discounts should only apply to a credit memo if one
had been realized on the receipt of the original invoice. With the current processing, users must re-
inquire on and change each credit memo where discounts are not wanted. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Invoice Entry processes have been enhanced to provide our customers the option to not calculate
discounts on credit memos. This enhancement eliminates this unnecessary effort and improves usability
and productivity.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Financial Year-End 2019—E1 1099 Update [90 : 26-Mar-2020]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Financial Management system has been updated in
accordance with the US government's 1099 reporting requirements for 2019. This enhancement enables
our customers to abide by the new regulations for the 1099 forms mandated by the Internal Revenue
Service (IRS) for 2019.
Note: This feature is also available for Release 9.1.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

General Ledger

Usability - Work with Batches [350 : 11-May-2023]


The Work with Batches (P0011) application will be modified to:

- Specify the version of the G/L Post (R09801) to be submitted for different batch types.

- Specify the version of the entry application to call for the different batch types.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Usability - Account Ledger Inquiry [360 : 11-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 152 of 202
The Account Ledger Inquiry (P09200 and P09201) applications will be modified for inquiry only access
to the voucher and payment applications accessible from this form.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Usability - Manual Reconciliation [370 : 11-May-2023]


The Manual Reconciliation (P09131) application will be modified to ensure the application's look and feel
is consistent with other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications. It will also be modified to provide a
single step process to reconcile transactions in the General Ledger (F0911) table and the Reconciliation
Work Table (F0911R) versus the current 2 step process.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Interactive Integrity Checking [450 : 26-May-2021]


Interactive integrity checking programs enables you to instantly identify potential financial integrity issues
with real time financial reconciliation instead of waiting to evaluate results from batch processes. After
reviewing any issues, you can quickly resolve the integrity issues within the integrity checking programs.
Also, you can set up watch lists for the interactive integrity checking programs to receive notification of
potential integrity issues.
The integrity checking programs are:
- Transactions to Batch Headers
- Batches Out of Balance
- Companies by Batch Out of Balance
- Companies Out of Balance
- Accounts to Business Units
- Account Balance to Account Master
- Account Ledger to Account Master

The Financial Integrities Work Table Purge enables you to purge records from all of the work tables in
the interactive integrity programs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released October 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: • Close your books sooner by finding and resolving integrity issues without waiting for a
report
• Reduce time to resolve issues with the ability to view and resolve discrepancies interactively
• Eliminate the need to work with pdf output to review issues
• Supplement your internal balancing procedures
• Eliminate the need to run corresponding batch programs

Real-Time Summarization: Account Ledger Inquiry, Account Inquiry by Object Account, and
Account Inquiry by Category Code [470 : 18-Apr-2015]
In the Account Ledger Inquiry, Account Inquiry by Object Account, and Account Inquiry by Category
Code programs, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review aggregated totals, instead of
scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 153 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Close month-end books sooner by quickly and easily comparing total posted amounts or
units vs. total unposted amounts or units, for any time period.

1099- Financial Year End for 2016 for EnterpriseOne [490 : 26-May-2021]
Each year the US Government makes modifications to their requirements for 1099 reporting. To ensure
our customers remain compliant with these requirements, we provide updated 1099s on a yearly basis
for supported releases.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: Release: 9.0, 9.1 and 9.2

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for General Ledger [500 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design
philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that provides the information you need to know at a glance with
alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway directly into the applications you need to use, when you
need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solution
for General Ledger:
- General Accounting Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Preconfigured Notifications for General Accounting [510 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for General Accounting. Your users can

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 154 of 202
subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for
your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Additional Preconfigured Notifications for General Accounting [520 : 25-May-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne plans to deliver additional notification content for General Accounting. Your
users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize
them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific
business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Balance Sheet Lessee Accounting for Multi-Currency Leases [530 : 20-Oct-2020]


The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and the Financial Accounting Standards Board
(FASB) have adopted new lease accounting standards which are effective from December 15, 2018 for
public companies and from December 15, 2020 for nonpublic companies. These accounting standards
provide investors and creditors more transparency into long-term leases of assets. The lease accounting
functionality of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system has been updated to support the requirements of the
revised standards.

Many EnterpriseOne customers lease assets for which the lease is denominated in a foreign currency.
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system has been enhanced to comply with the standard for these multi-
currency leases. Functionality for Lease Liability Account Gains and/or Losses and Revaluation of the
Right of Use Asset Account due to currency exchange rate fluctuations are being provided with this
feature.

Note: This feature is also available for Release 9.1.


Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Comprehensive Tracking Method for Lessee Accounting Journal Entries by Leased Assets [540 :
20-Oct-2020]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Lessee Accounting processes that are used to create journal entries
have been enhanced to optionally include subledgers in the journal entries. The system can be
configured to either include or exclude subledgers containing the leased asset ID in all the Lessee
Accounting entries including recurring billing, manual billing, lease commencement, monthly journals,
remeasurement, and early termination. This functionality enables customers to more easily track and
reconcile lessee accounting journal entries by leased asset.
Note: Also available for Release 9.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Date Patterns Other than R for Amortization Schedule Creation [550 : 25-May-2021]
An enhancement to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Lease Accounting Amortization Creation process

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 155 of 202
facilitates the use of the date pattern associated with the billing frequency for recurring billing information
during the creation of amortization schedules. Therefore, customers using other date patterns do not
have to maintain the date pattern R specifically set up in their system for recurring billing. This
enhancement simplifies the setup and maintenance of the information needed for lessee balance sheet
accounting.
Note: Also available for Release 9.1
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

G/L Batch Status History [560 : 20-Oct-2020]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financial Management now provides a history for all additions and updates
to the batch status in the Batch Header (F0011) table. This enhancement enables auditors and
accountants to audit actions (who, what, when) taken against all batches of general ledger transactions,
resulting in improved financial controls and strengthening Segregation of Duties compliance.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Detailed Cash Basis Error Messaging Enables Faster Resolution [570 : 20-Oct-2020]
The general ledger cash basis report performs edits for many conditions such as missing AAIs, invalid
account numbers, invalid posting edit codes, and invalid document types. Accountants had found that in
many cases, the error messages produced by these edits were difficult to follow and not detailed enough
to facilitate easy resolution of the errors. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne General Ledger Cash Basis
Entries report has been enhanced to provide accounting specialists with detailed and informative error
messages, significantly reducing the time required to clear cash basis errors.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Flexibility to Print Reconciled and Unreconciled Items on the Reconciliation Report [580 : 25-
May-2021]
As part of period-end processes, accountants need to reconcile balances and verify that none of the
accounts have any unreconciled transaction. To fulfil this need, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Print
Reconciliation Report (R09132P) has been enhanced to give an option to print Total Open Amount,
Balance per Book, and Books plus Open amounts when there are no unreconciled transactions for an
account. This enhancement provides the accountants with the certainty that all accounts are reconciled,
and improves the accuracy of their financial statements.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Accounts Payable

Real-Time Summarization: Supplier Ledger Inquiry [180 : 18-Apr-2015]


In the Supplier Ledger Inquiry program, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review
aggregated totals, instead of scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 156 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Make business decisions in real time by accessing account balances by supplier, currency, or
normalized across currency.
For example:
- A/P specialists can respond live to inquiries
- Cash managers can make real-time decisions on currency exposures
- A/P managers can use real-time information to help minimize late fees

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Accounts Payable [190 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Accounts Receivable:
- Accounts Payable Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Preconfigured Notifications for Accounts Payable [200 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Accounts Payable. Your users can
subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for
your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 157 of 202
Payment Control Group Report Updated to Include Additional Information [210 : 14-Aug-2018]
The updated Payment Control Group report includes additional fields to enable customers to review and
validate more easily. The report now includes the following fields:

•Header of the page:


-Payment Control Group number
-Formatted bank account in the customer's format
•Bank account details for each supplier:
-IBAN, SWIFT, and Control Digit fields to accompany the bank account number and bank transit
number already shown on
the report when you request to print the Bank Tape information.

Note: Also available for 9.1 release.


Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This functionality enables you to more easily validate the payment group and the bank
account master details for suppliers before sending payments.

Optionally Calculating Discounts on Credit Vouchers [220 : 25-May-2021]


Currently, payment terms that can generate discounts get applied to credit vouchers just as they do to
standard vouchers. From a business perspective, discounts should only apply to a credit voucher if one
had been realized on the payment of the original voucher. With the current processing, users must re-
inquire on and change each credit voucher where discounts are not wanted. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Voucher Entry processes have been enhanced to provide our customers the option to not calculate
discounts on credit vouchers. This enhancement eliminates this unnecessary effort and improves
usability and productivity.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Option to Restrict Payments to Posted Vouchers for Manual Payments [230 : 20-Oct-2020]
The Manual Payment with Match program (P0413M) now enables users to set up the system to restrict
the selection of vouchers to be paid to only those vouchers that have been posted. This new level of
control in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable Manual Payment with Match program
(P0413M) ensures compliance with finance department requirements.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of September 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Voucher Withholding Tax Flexibility [240 : 20-Oct-2020]


Companies with complex accounts payable withholding requirements need to define how withholding tax
is calculated. To meet this requirement, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable Calculate
Withholding Batch program (R04580) now enables accounts payable users to configure the system to
calculate withholding tax based on either the gross or taxable amount of the voucher. This
enhancement provides accounts payable specialists the much needed flexibility when calculating the
withholding tax of the voucher.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2019)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 158 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Inclusion of Supplier Invoice Number in CTX Payment Format [250 : 25-May-2021]


The payment format generated by the Create A/P Bank Tape - CTX Format program (R04572T2) now
includes the supplier's invoice number from the voucher (RPVINV). The invoice number is included in
record 7 element RMR*IN according to NACHA standards. This enhancement ensures that outbound
payments are in compliance with the NACHA standards.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Flexibility in Assigning G/L Bank Account for Manual Payments [260 : 20-Oct-2020]
The Manual Payment with Match program (P0413M) has been enhanced to enable accounts payable
specialists to use the G/L bank account from the PB AAI or from the selected vouchers when creating a
manual payment. This enhancement provides accounts payable specialists the much needed flexibility
when creating manual payments.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Vertex Sales and Use Tax V8.0 Certification [270 : 26-Mar-2020]


The certification of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne (9.1 and 9.2) with the Vertex Sales and Use Tax Version
8.0 enables integration with the latest version of the Vertex product.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This certification enables our customers to smoothly upgrade to the latest Vertex Sales and
Use Tax release.

Option to Update Business Unit and Asset in "Multi" Voucher Entry Programs [280 : 20-Oct-
2020]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Payable Multi Voucher-Single Supplier, Multi Company-Single
Supplier, and Multi Voucher-Multi Supplier applications have been enhanced to enable users to update
the business unit and asset on each line during entry. This enhancement improves the usability of the
application by eliminating additional manual updates after entry.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

2020 1099 – Important Information on MISC and NEC Forms [290 : 25-May-2021]
Starting with the 2020 1099 year-end reporting, nonemployee compensation is no longer reported on the
1099 MISC form - box 7. Instead, it is reported on a new form, 1099 NEC (Nonemployee
Compensation). In addition, the 2020 1099 MISC form layout has changed with the position of several
boxes being revised. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is offering clients who are on release 9.2 the
opportunity to test the upcoming changes in advance by applying a test ESU. The ESU must be
requested through MyOracleSupport. For details please see E1: 1099: 2020 Year End Tax Reporting
Changes for 1099 MISC and 1099 NEC ESU for Testing Purpose Release EnterpriseOne 9.2 (Doc ID
2690705.1).

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 159 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Vertex Sales and Use Tax V9.0 Certification [300 : 20-Oct-2021]


The certification of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 9.2 with the Vertex Sales and Use Tax Version 9.0
enables integration with the latest version of the Vertex product. This certification enables you to
smoothly upgrade to the latest Vertex Sales and Use Tax release.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Financial Year End 2021 - E1 1099 [320 : 09-May-2023]


Each year the US Government updates its requirements for Form 1099 reporting. As every other year,
JD Edwards provides updated Form 1099 formats for 2021 to ensure that users remain compliant with
these requirements. New for 2021, JD Edwards also provides limited support for Form 1099-G.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2022

Consider All Roles of a User for the Unmasking of Bank Account Numbers [340 : 19-Oct-2022]
The Bank Account Masking feature can now check all the roles for which a user is currently authorized
in a specific environment. If the user signs in with *ALL for their role, or if the Role Chooser option is not
active, and if the system finds any active role authorized for unmasking, it unmasks bank account
numbers for that user. This removes the requirement for activating the Role Chooser option at login to
use bank account masking, and enables users who log in with *ALL roles to unmask bank accounts
without choosing a specific role.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)

Financial Year End 2022 - E1 1099 [350 : 23-Jan-2023]


Each year the US Government modifies their requirements for Form 1099 reporting. JD Edwards
provides updated Form 1099 formats for 2022 to ensure that users remain compliant with these
requirements.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Workflow to Review and Approve Vouchers [360 : 11-Apr-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne introduces a workflow to provide its users the flexibility to quickly and easily
review and approve vouchers that exceed the limit set for auto-approval. This helps them release
payment on such vouchers in a timely manner.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 160 of 202
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Financial Year End 2023 -1099 Update [370 : 08-Dec-2023]


Each year, the US Government modifies its requirements for 1099 reporting. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
provides updated 1099 formats for 2023 to ensure that you remain compliant with these requirements
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:DECEMBER 2023

Voucher Match Automation Process [70 : 11-May-2023]


Added features for the Voucher Match Automation process including:

•The addition of a new automation rule. This new rule will allow you to
match a single invoice line to multiple purchase order receipts across
multiple purchase orders.
•Suggestion only mode – this feature will not perform the full match
functionality but will only suggest receipts to match for an invoice
line. If a receipt has been suggested for an invoice line, it will be
reserved and cannot be matched or suggested to another invoice line
until the suggestion has been cleared.
•A workbench to review, approve, reject, process, and create
suggestions. The workbench will also allow you to review invoices
that have been matched and not yet purged.
•Supplier level controls to determine whether Purchase Order and/or
Item information is required on the invoice line prior to processing.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Voucher Match Automation Process - Multiple Invoice Lines, Partial Receipt [80 : 08-Apr-2015]
Voucher Match Automation includes these features:

• Match of invoice lines to partially received purchase order detail lines.


• Ability to create a single voucher for an invoice with one or more invoice
lines.
• Ability to apply a tolerance to match invoice lines to a receipt that is greater than
the invoice amount.
• Supplier level controls for suggestion processing, matching of partial
receipts, and single voucher for an invoice with multiple invoice lines.
• An EnterpriseOne Page to make it easy to work through the process.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Receivable Invoice Business Interface [110 : 11-May-2023]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 161 of 202
A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Business Interface for the Accounts Receivable Invoice. This Business
Interface will give you the ability to query, insert, update, delete, and be notified of changes to A/R
invoices. This functionality will be provided with a set of Business Services, Batch Processes for Import
and Export, and Real Time Events.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Real-Time Summarization: Customer Ledger Inquiry [210 : 26-May-2021]


In the Customer Ledger Inquiry program, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review
aggregated totals, instead of scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Make business decisions in real time by accessing account balances by customer, line of
business, currency, or normalized across currency. For example:
- A/R specialists can respond live to customer inquiries
- Cash managers can make real-time decisions on currency exposures
- Credit managers can decide immediately whether to extend credit

Revenue Recognition [220 : 11-May-2023]


The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International Accounting Standards Board
(IASB) created a joint standard regarding the recognition of revenue. This standard will be effective for
the first quarterly report in the first annual period beginning after December 15, 2017 ( for public
companies) and after December 15, 2018 (for non-public companies). Organizations may choose to
adopt the new standard one year earlier that these dates.

This feature enhances existing processes and adds a new feature for Accounts Receivable to enable
users to abide by the new five step process for revenue recognition:

1. Identify the contract with the customer


2. Identify the separate performance obligations in the contract
3. Determine the transaction price
4. Allocate the transaction price to the separate performance obligations
5. Recognize revenue as separate performance obligations are satisfied

This feature affects all products that recognize revenue including Accounts Receivable, Sales Order
Management, Advanced Contract Billing, Contract and Service Billing, and Project Costing.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (also released for 9.1)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This feature enables users to be compliant with the new standard for recognition of revenue
that was published by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) and the International
Accounting Standards Board (IASB).

Processing Negative Receipts Using Automatic Receipts [230 : 26-May-2021]


Zero or negative value receipts can be included in the automatic receipts process to:

- Clear a credit memo with a negative value receipt.


Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 162 of 202
- Match a negative or zero value receipt to several invoices and credit memos that add up to a negative
or zero amount.
- Clear a zero dollar invoice with a zero value receipt.

The system does not allow negative value receipts with an unapplied amount.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Accounts Receivable [240 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Accounts Receivable:
- Collections Manager
- Accounts Receivable Manager
- Credit Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Preconfigured Notifications for Accounts Receivable [250 : 26-May-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Accounts Receivable. Your users can
subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for
your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 163 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Configurability of Delinquency Notices [260 : 09-Apr-2019]


When printing delinquency notices, JD Edwards customers want to print a combination of delinquent
invoices, non-delinquent invoices, and credit memos on the notices. Currently, customers only have the
option of printing all invoices or only delinquent invoices on their delinquency notices. The delinquency
notice print process has been enhanced to allow for any combination of invoices to be printed on the
delinquency notice. This enhancement will give JD Edwards customer the flexibility they need when
printing delinquency notices to ensure that the details they require when communicating with their
customers.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Pay Status Code for Zero Amount Pay Items on Invoices [270 : 25-May-2021]
Currently, pay items on an invoice with a zero amount automatically have a pay status of "A –
Approved". These items then appear on the A/R to G/L Receipts by batch integrity reports as items with
an invalid pay status. To resolve these items, users must apply a receipt to the zero-amount invoice.
This enhancement provides a processing option on the A/R Master Business Function to enable users
to choose the pay status for these lines. It ensures that these lines do not appear on the integrity reports
and facilitates processing these lines along with the other pay items on the invoice.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Invoice Print Report with Payment Term Details [280 : 25-May-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Financials system has been enhanced to include a version of R03B505
to print the additional invoice details that include payment term description, tax rate area, tax explanation
description, and sales order details such as, document number, document type, and document company
on the Invoice Print report. This enhancement provides additional valuable information on the printed
invoice.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Prevent Duplicate Mailing Name on an Invoice [290 : 26-Mar-2020]


The Invoice Print program (P03B505) has been updated to prevent the mailing name from being printed
twice on the invoice if the Alpha Name and Mailing Name are the same for a customer. This
enhancement ensures that duplicate information is not printed on the invoice and the invoice appears
more professional.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Enabling Data Selection per Customer for R7403B001 [300 : 12-Nov-2019]


A new processing option Customer has been added to the Generate Customer Balance program
(R7403B001) to enable data selection per customer. This is an optional feature.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 164 of 202
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Greater Control Over Discounts on Partial Payments for Automatic Receipts [310 : 20-Oct-2020]
Allowing full cash discount for a partial payment within the terms of discount due date even though the
remaining balance is not paid, causes customers to opt for unearned cash discounts. To overcome this
gap, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable Automatic Receipts processes have been
enhanced to provide a configuration which determines whether or not discounts can be taken on partial
payments of invoices. This enhancement provides accounts receivable specialists greater control over
discounts given to customers on partial payments, controlling direct financial impact on the receivables
and avoiding revenue reduction.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Improved Data Quality for Invoices, Receipts, and Drafts [320 : 01-Jul-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Accounts Receivable applications have been enhanced to ensure
improved data quality for invoices, receipts, and drafts. This enhancement ensures that invoices,
receipts, and drafts cannot be updated by another application when they are already in the process of
being updated by another application. This enhancement provides accounts receivable specialists with
improved data quality and transaction integrity for invoices, receipts, and drafts.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Ability to Review Customer Account Balance Information Based on the Current Credit or
Collection Manager [330 : 25-May-2021]
Analyzing the account balance details of customers based on the current credit or collection manager is
vital for accounts receivable departments. To enable this analysis, JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has
updated its processes that support the Account Balance Inquiry (P03B218) program to include the
current credit or collection manager for the customer in the data that supports this activity. The Update
A/R from Address Book (R03B802) program has been updated to facilitate the accounts receivable data
to be updated with the current credit or collection manager associated with the customer. Also, the
Credit Analysis Refresh (R03B525) program has also been enhanced so that it can process information
based on the credit or collection manager associated with the customer. These enhancements ensure
that the Account Balance Inquiry application contains data with the most current credit or collection
manager. These enhancements provide credit and collection managers the ability to analyze account
information for their current customers, enabling them to make strategic decisions for the collection of
funds from customers and adjustments to credit limits.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Collections and Credit Bureau Submissions Terminology [340 : 08-Apr-2021]


JD Edwards has updated the terminology used in the programs and objects which create data files for
submission to the credit rating services supported by JD Edwards: Experian, Dun & Bradstreet(D&B)
and CREDITEL. This updated terminology better reflects the current file format.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 165 of 202
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Allow Attachments per Company (per LOB) in Customer Master [360 : 19-Oct-2022]
EnterpriseOne now gives its users the flexibility to store attachments in the Customer Master table
indexed by Address Book Number and Company (Line of Business). This capability removes the
limitation of every attachment showing up for all companies and provides users with the ability to attach
and view customer information specific to a particular Company.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Additional Fields in Base A/R Invoice Print [370 : 11-Apr-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has enhanced the A/R Invoice Print (R03B505) to print additional fields such
as, Tax ID, Tax Rate Percentage, Payment Term, Order Company, and Order Type that are needed in
common business scenarios.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Enhanced A/R Statistical History Refresh (R03B16A) for Large Data Sets [380 : 21-Jun-2023]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne enhances A/R Statistical History Refresh (R03B16A) to process large data
sets to provide statistical information that is used to analyze payment trends of customers.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2023

Expense Management

Simplified Removal of Employee Master Data [100 : 20-Oct-2020]


Employees who are eligible to be reimbursed for expenses are assigned an employee profile in the
expense management system. Optionally, these employees may be issued a corporate card. Employee
expense administrators often remove the employee profile and credit card master data when an
employee leaves the organization or if that information was entered in error. The JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Expense Management system has simplified this process so that when an employee
profile is deleted, any associated credit card master data for the employee is automatically removed as
well. This simplified process improves data quality by eliminating the risk of an administrator removing
the profile, but forgetting to remove the associated credit card.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Capability for Proxies to Submit Expenses [120 : 25-May-2021]


Employees with the authority to enter and review expense reports for other employees also need the
ability to submit those expense reports. JD Edwards Expense Management now provides additional
configuration allowing proxies to submit expense reports for others. This capability ensures business

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 166 of 202
continuity during employee absences and provides an auditable framework for proxies.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Mobile Expense Management – Photo Management [60 : 11-May-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Mobile Expense Management provides the ability to manage your expense
reports from a mobile device. This feature allows users to manage the photos attached to their expense
reports. Support for photo attachments will also enable users to access the camera feature of their
mobile device to take a photo of a receipt then upload it as an attachment to their expense report.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Improve Productivity
- Review and approve Expense Reports regardless of your physical location
- Enter, update, capture photos of receipts, and submit Expense Reports from anywhere you can make
a call
- Easy to use mobile applications

Shorten Expense Management Lifecycle


- Decrease time to submit expenses
- Simplifies approval process
- Reduce cycle time

Improve User Experience


- Intuitive and easy to navigate
- Designed for the casual user
- Choice of devices based on user preference

Expense Category Description in Expense Entry [80 : 06-Apr-2018]


The user experience within the Expense Entry Application has been improved by including the Expense
Category Description along with the Expense Category Code for easier comprehension, resulting in
more accurate expense reporting.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Fixed Asset Accounting

Lessor Accounting [220 : 07-Jul-2021]


The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and the Financial Accounting Standards Board
(FASB) have adopted new Lease Accounting standards set to be effective January 1, 2019. They have
issued IFRS 16 and ASC 842, respectively, with the object of increasing transparency and comparability
among organizations by recognizing lease assets and lease liabilities on the balance sheet and
disclosing key information about leasing arrangements.

The regulations require non-property (such as equipment) and property long-term leases to go on the
balance sheet. The regulations impact all customers globally who lease assets. The feature will be
delivered in phases, and will integrate with the Fixed Asset and Accounts Payable systems for automatic
lease payments and balance sheet updates. The feature will provide support for:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 167 of 202
- Lessors and lessees.
- Property and non-property leases.
- Single and multi-asset leases.

In this phase, enhancements were made to give an alternative way of specifying how the system should
process FASB 13. Instead of specifying values in the Processing Options for R15130, the user now has
the choice to specify FASB 13 processing values at the lease and bill code level, thus giving users more
flexibility and ease of changing how FASB 13 is run. Additional FASB 13 setup that has been added
includes the ability to specify user defined dates which will give the user the ability to run FASB 13
generation across an entire lease that would include all lease versions and any holdovers.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2017)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This phase of updates includes the following changes to support Lessor Accounting, and to
more easily support straight line rent report (FASB 13):

- Users can define which bill codes to include in FASB 13 processing during bill code setup. That value
is then used as a default during recurring billing setup for a lease. You can override the default value on
the recurring billing setup.

- A new program, Lease FASB 13 Setup (P15131), has been created to enable users to review, and if
allowed, update the FASB 13 setup for leases. You can use filter criteria to view all leases that have
FASB 13 setup information, view all leases that do not have the setup, or easily review the setup for all
leases. There is an Append on Regeneration option, which enables users to specify whether, when a
lease term has been changed, the subsequent run of the R15130 appends the FASB 13 records
associated with the new lease term to the existing FASB 13 records, or if the existing records are
deleted, and FASB 13 records for the lease are regenerated.

- The FASB 13 Revisions program (P1513) has been updated to include a new inquiry form that enables
users to view all records in the F1513B table, across leases, that might require FASB 13 processing to
be regenerated due to changes that were made after FASB 13 information was last generated. Users
can also update the FASB 13 Generation Control field for a group of selected records. Users can select
a record, and use a new Row menu option to roll back all records that have the same lease, building,
unit, and batch number as a selected record to the previous generation of FASB 13.

- The Advanced Real Estate Forecasting system was updated to enable users to define the bill codes
that they want to include when creating real estate forecasts using the P15L106 (AREF Recurring Bill
Code Rules program).

- The FASB 13 Generation program (R15130) was updated to regenerate FASB 13 information for early
termination of a lease. Previously, when you ran the R15130 using an As Of Date that was greater than
the end date of the lease, the program would produce an error.

- Users can view, and if allowed, update the FASB 13 Generation flag on the recurring billing records of
a lease.

- The system has been updated to more accurately identify records that have changes that could impact
FASB 13 processing, and might require FASB 13 information to be regenerated.

- The following reports have been updated to display the FASB 13 Generation option:
- Bill Code Listing report (R15450)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 168 of 202
- Recurring Billing Listing report (R154011)
- Lease Master Listing report (R15401)

- The Real Estate Management Constants program (P1510) has been updated to include FASB 13
fields. When leases are created after the FASB 13 constants have been defined, the system
automatically adds those default values to the leases. You can set the processing options on P1501 and
P1502 to specify whether users are allowed to override the default FASB 13 values that are populated
from the constants.

- The Lease Information program (P1501) has been updated to support lease-specific FASB 13 setup.
When you create a lease, the system looks to the Real Estate Management Constants program (P1510)
to determine if default FASB 13 setup information exists, and if so the system automatically updates the
lease with the default values.

- The FASB 13 R.B. Update program (R15132) has been updated to enable users to enter lease version
selection information, and specify the FASB 13 Begin Date in the processing options.

- The Lease Global Update program (R15117) has been updated with a new processing option that
enables users to specify that they want to update the FASB 13 Revisions table (F1513B) when the
program is processed.

Lessee Accounting for Non-Property [230 : 26-May-2021]


The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and the Financial Accounting Standards Board
(FASB) have issued IFRS 16 and ASC 842, respectively, with the objective of increasing transparency
and comparability among organizations by recognizing lease assets and lease liabilities on the balance
sheet and disclosing key information about leasing arrangements. The main differences between IFRS
16 and ASC 842 are in relation to the lessee accounting model. IFRS 16 requires all leases to be
accounted for as finance leases, while ASC 842 distinguishes between finance and operating leases.

The accounting standard changes provide investors and creditors more transparency into long-term
leases of assets for lessees. Lessees and Lessors will be able to recognize leases greater than 12
months on their balance sheets.

For lessees of non-property (equipment, vehicles, etc.), this enhancement lays the foundation at the
lease level for what will be required to create the accounting entries for leased assets, including the
accounting calculations for the lease liability and Right-of-Use Asset entries.

Additionally, users have the ability to create an alternate set of amortization schedules that can be used
to generate journal entries in an alternate ledger. These alternate ledger journals can be used to report
to another entity that is governed by a different accounting standard. For example, a child company is
governed by accounting standards that require they create their lessee lease as an operating lease.
However, they must report to a parent company in a different country that is governed by a different
accounting standard, under which the same lease would be considered a finance lease. In this scenario,
you create your primary schedules with a lease classification of operating, and create an alternate set of
schedules with a lease classification of finance. These alternate schedules can track the lease liability
and ROU asset financial data in an alternate ledger for reporting to the parent company.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: For lessees of non-property, this enhancement lays the foundation at the lease level for what
will be required to create the accounting entries for leased assets, including the accounting calculations
for the lease liability and Right-of-Use Asset entries. This feature will include:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 169 of 202
- Ability to set lease classification defaults.
- Ability to set defaults for lease payable items to be used in the lease liability and right-of-use asset and
other calculations.
- Ability to automatically create an asset in the Asset Master if one does not already exist.
- Ability to override the default lease classification for each lease.
- Ability to override lease classification for each asset on a lease.
- Ability to override payable defaults.
- Ability to specify the lease liability, right-of-use asset and other accounts.
- Ability to, at lease commencement, create the lease liability and right-of-use asset amortization
schedules for each asset on a lease for the entire length of the lease.
- Ability to, at lease commencement for each asset on a lease, create the initial lease liability, right-of-
use asset and other accounting entries.
- Ability to handle accounting related to payables in advance and in arrears.
- Ability to create AP accounting entries for payables for each asset on a lease.
- Ability to create period-end accounting entries.
- Ability to create alternate sets of amortization schedules when reporting to an entity governed by a
different accounting standard.
Examples: A simplified example of this feature would involve a lessee leasing a piece of equipment for
more than 12 months. The system can be set up so that the lease for this equipment is included on the
balance sheet, manual and recurring billing information is set up, amortization schedules are created,
journal entries are generated and posted, and period-end processing can be done to properly account
for this leased asset in the financial system.

Flexibility to Set Defaults for Displaying Child and Disposed Assets in Asset Master and
Equipment Master [260 : 25-May-2021]
Users who rarely have the need to view child assets or disposed assets can now configure the
applications so that these assets are not displayed by default. This improvement provides flexibility so
that the default behavior of the Asset Master and Equipment Master applications for displaying child and
disposed assets or equipment can be set based on the user or role preference. This capability simplifies
user experience and reduces the number of clicks.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Default Current Fiscal Year in Fixed Asset Transaction Reports [270 : 25-May-2021]
Many organizations run their fixed asset transaction reports regularly, often running them as scheduled
jobs. The Unposted Fixed Asset Transaction report and the Process Fixed Asset Transaction Integrity
report can now be configured to run over the current fiscal year by default, eliminating the need to
modify versions for each new fiscal year.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Improved Data Quality Between Asset Master and Equipment Master [280 : 25-May-2021]
The Asset Transfer program now updates the Responsible Business Unit in the Equipment Master table
as well as the Asset Master table. This change ensures data integrity between the Asset Master and
Equipment Master tables when you make a global change of asset information during the transfer of a
fixed asset.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 170 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Improved Asset Cost Analysis [290 : 06-Dec-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne introduces a new program for the review of the Asset and Maintenance
costs. This program provides its users with improved and accurate data for asset cost analysis thereby
enriching their overall experience with the cost review.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Joint Venture Management

Joint Venture Hierarchy - ADF to JET Conversion [100 : 13-Oct-2021]


To provide users an easy view of the structure of the business units that comprise a joint venture, as
well as of each business unit's place in the joint venture in an easy to consume, visual format, JD
Edwards is converting from the ADF-based to JET application. The JET Joint Venture Hierarchy
application reduces time and frustration for users seeking understanding about how business units in the
joint venture are related. The hierarchy also provides basic description and contact information for the
joint venture itself and for the business units that comprise the joint venture.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Improved Processing Method for Large Volumes of Joint Venture Account Ledger Transactions
[110 : 13-Oct-2021]
JD Edwards has added a batch job for processing large volumes of joint venture account ledger
transactions. This batch job is more convenient for processing large volumes of transactions than the
Work with JV Account Ledger program (P09J12).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Improved Processing Method for Large Volumes of Joint Venture Account Ledger Revisions [120
: 13-Oct-2021]
JD Edwards has added a batch job for processing large volumes of joint venture account ledger
revisions. This batch job is more convenient for processing large volumes of revisions than the Joint
Venture Account Ledger Revisions program (P09J11).
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Foreign Currency Joint Venture Cash Calls [130 : 13-Oct-2021]


The Joint Venture Management system is enhanced to include the ability to define cash calls in any
currency and process invoices in the specified currency. This new capability helps meet business
requirements where cash calls must be made in a currency other than the joint venture base company
currency.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 171 of 202
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Support for JVM in a Non-Currency Environment [140 : 09-May-2023]


The Joint Venture Management system now fully supports a non-currency environment.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Joint Venture Management Distribution Detail Voids Using a Batch Process [150 : 19-Oct-2022]
There is now a batch job for processing voids for large volumes of joint venture distribution detail
transactions. This batch job is more convenient for processing large volumes of transactions than the
interactive Work with Joint Venture Distribution Detail by Document program.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

View Joint Venture Parent BU in Business Units and Job Master Applications [160 : 06-Dec-2023]
Joint Venture Parent Business Unit is now included in Business Units and Job Master programs. This
helps to view Joint Venture related Business Units in a single form.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Joint Venture Management - Percentage of Ownership and Distributions [20 : 26-May-2021]


In a joint venture project, companies need the ability to track common project costs, and distribute the
costs to the various parties based on their predefined portion of ownership.

The functionalities included in the Joint Venture Management – Percentage of Ownership and
Distributions feature for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne enable you to:

- Define the joint venture (JV) as a legal entity along with tax and other related information.
- Include one or more entities (such as buildings, wells, or projects) for a single JV.
- Define the attributes for the JV, for example, the minimum amount to use for payments and invoicing,
and the status of the JV (whether active or not).
- Record the list of entities that are approvers of the JV and track the approval date.
- Define the date-effective percentage of ownership of a JV.
- Define the accounts to distribute expenses and revenue among the partners in the joint ventures.
- Override the percentage of ownership at the account or transaction level.
- Extract joint venture costs from the general ledger for distribution to the partners.
- Calculate the pro rata share of each JV member based on the date-effective percentage of ownership
rules.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 172 of 202
Joint Venture Management - Overhead [30 : 25-May-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Joint Venture Management solution helps the managing partner on joint
ventures to easily comply with the joint operating agreements by providing flexibility and transparency to
calculate and distribute indirect costs (overhead).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The functionalities included in the Joint Venture Management - Overhead feature for JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne enable you to:
•Track the operational status of the joint venture and business units within the joint venture
•Calculate overhead charges for the joint venture based on five common overhead methods:
oFixed Amount
oFixed Amount with Escalation
oFixed Percent
oFixed Percent with Sliding Scale
oDay Rate
•Flexibility to specify user defined methods for overhead calculation
•Distribute overhead charges to the joint venture partners based on the percentage of ownership in the
joint venture

Joint Venture Management - Billing [40 : 25-May-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Joint Venture Management system provides the ability to track direct
and indirect costs and then distribute and invoice the costs to the partners based on their predefined
division of interest. It also provides the ability to track and distribute revenue for the joint venture and
then pay the partners based on their predefined division of interest.

The functionality included in the Joint Venture Management – Billing feature for JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne enable you to:

- Create invoices and vouchers for each partner's pro rata share of cost and revenue.
- Support the creation of joint venture financial statements and reports.
- Suspend the creation of an invoice or voucher for transactions that do not meet the set minimum
amounts.
- Print invoices for partners using a preconfigured invoice template.
- Void or delete distributed transactions to correct distribution information.
- Purge joint venture data that are not needed.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2018)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Companies can gain significant benefits from the JD Edwards Joint Venture Management
solution including:

- Improving operational efficiency with applications that provide visibility into joint venture transactions
and the distribution of the transactions to the joint venture partners.
- Reducing month-end close with automated processes that:
oCreate and print invoices for each partner's share of expenses.
oCreate and pay vouchers for each partner's share of revenue.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 173 of 202
- Using standard JD Edwards reporting processes to generate financial statements and reporting for the
joint venture.

Joint Venture Management - Joint Venture Hierarchy [50 : 25-May-2021]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Joint Venture Management system provides the ability to view the joint
venture hierarchy in a chart format. You can view basic information about a joint venture, project
business units, and child business units included in the joint venture. You have several options that you
can use to have a better view of the hierarchy and of each business unit in the hierarchy. The options
include: a range of layouts, zoom features, ability to open a business unit in a separate window with a
bigger display, collapse and expand the business units as required, and send email to the primary
contact of a business unit.

A CafeOne layout is delivered with the software that enables you to view the joint venture hierarchy from
within the Joint Venture Master program (P09J30). To complement the CafeOne layout, a list view grid
format and a personal form are also delivered to use with the application.

Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2018)


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Advanced Variable Numerator Allocations for Joint Ventures [60 : 25-May-2021]


The Advanced Variable Numerator Allocations feature has been enhanced to include joint venture-
based allocation. This enhancement will allow the allocation of the indirect costs incurred by the
managing partner to the different joint ventures and business units that benefited from the costs. After
the costs are allocated to the impacted joint ventures and their business units, the amounts can be
distributed to the joint venture partners.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Cash Calls for Joint Ventures [70 : 20-Oct-2020]


In many joint ventures, the partners infuse cash into the joint venture at the start and through the life of
the joint venture as needed. This is known as a cash call. The managing partner is responsible for
managing and reporting on the cash calls for each partner and drawing against the cash calls as costs
are distributed to the partners.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Technology Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The functionality included in the Joint Venture Management – Cash Calls feature for JD
Edwards EnterpriseOne will enable you to:

-Create cash calls


-Draw on cash calls
-Transfer cash calls
-Void or reverse cash calls
-Close the cash calls and refund the balance to the partners
-Report on the cash calls

Joint Venture Management Parent Number for Hierarchy [80 : 25-May-2021]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 174 of 202
The Joint Venture Management hierarchy design has been modified to ensure that the accounting
processes can be performed by the distribution and manufacturing systems at the business unit or
branch plant level based on the requirement of the customers who use these systems. It is
recommended that all JD Edwards customers using the Joint Venture Management system apply this
feature upon its availability.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Joint Venture Management - Selection of Transactions by GL Date [90 : 09-May-2023]


In Joint Venture Management, Service/Tax Date is used in many applications to select records that need
to be processed. But for many business scenarios, the transactions that have to be distributed or
accounted for in compliance with a Joint Venture Agreement (JVA) must have occurred in the
accounting period. Therefore, in these situations, selection of records should be based on the General
Ledger (GL) Date. Multiple applications have been modified to enable selection by either Service/Tax
Date or GL Date. Selecting transactions from the correct period increases the accuracy of accounting for
Joint Venture transactions.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 175 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Manufacturing
Configurator

Product Cost Detail for Configured Items [80 : 04-Jun-2021]


When turned on in Branch/Plant Constants, Product Cost Detail is now supported for configure to order
items when running the Sales Update program (R42800). Prior to this enhancement product cost detail
processing was not supported because it was based on frozen standard costs which don't exist for
configured items. Now, for configured items, cost details are retrieved from the production cost table
instead.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Requirements Planning

Item Safety Stock Displayed in the Times Series Header [100 : 02-Jun-2021]
Items safety stock quantities are now displayed in the Time Series header. This makes the potential
effect of safety stock on planning outputs immediately visible to planners and buyers without the need to
exit to the quantities table.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Efficient Forecast Records Management [110 : 02-Jun-2021]


Managing the volume of forecast records improves requirements planning performance. A new program
has been provided to purge selected forecast records, and optionally save them to a history table,
eliminating the need for a manual or customized process.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Requirements Planning Summary and Console [120 : 13-Oct-2021]


Planners and buyers often struggle to quickly analyze and manage large volumes of action messages
generated by the master scheduling and material and distribution requirements planning programs. This
process is made much more efficient and user-friendly by a graphical presentation of the messages
summarized and prioritized based on user-preferences, and then presented in the context of an

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 176 of 202
interactive, real-time supply/demand detail table with supporting charts and graphical alerts. Actual and
planned replenishment orders can be modified and created within this table with the results displayed
before any changes are actually made. Until changes are saved or implemented, the plan can be
restored to its original state with a click of a button. When planning manufactured items, critical
component alerts provide immediate visibility of the potential material constraints.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Match Supply/Demand Inquiry Interplant Demand Forecast Consumption with MRP [130 : 20-Jul-
2021]
Planners and buyers can now view the Supply/Demand Inquiry program (P4021) such that interplant
demand does not consume the forecast. A new processing option has been added to the Supply &
Demand Inquiry program to specify up to five document types to be excluded from consuming the
forecast. Prior to this enhancement, all sales orders including transfers consumed forecast which was
potentially inconsistent with requirements planning outputs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Automated Safety Stock Population [150 : 06-Dec-2023]


For material requirements planning, safety stock provides protection against unforeseen fluctuations in
supply or demand. JD Edwards provides the ability to have safety stock quantities calculated and
populated by the system thus eliminating the need to manually maintain them.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Real-Time Summarization: Forecast Revisions [40 : 18-Apr-2015]


In the Forecast Revisions program, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review aggregated
totals, instead of scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Minimize budgeting time by quickly and easily comparing different forecasts, such as best fit
vs. lost cost.

MRP Availability Checking [50 : 21-Apr-2015]


The multi-facility planning functionality now enables the use of the availability checking feature without
the need to immediately process transfer orders (through shipment confirmation and purchase order
receipt). Previously, planning messages were generated without respect to availability checking if there
was an existing open transfer.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Preconfigured Notifications for Requirements Planning [60 : 09-Nov-2021]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 177 of 202
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Requirements Planning. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Lot Date Selection for Requirements Planning [70 : 02-Jun-2021]


This feature improves the requirements planning of lot-controlled items by reducing unconsumed
inventory quantities based on a lot date such as the sell by date rather than the expiration date. A
processing option has been added for any one of the following dates to be used by Requirements
Planning (R3482 and R3483) and the Supply/Demand Inquiry and report (P4021, R4051) for availability
calculations: Expiration Date, Sell By Date, Best Before Date, User Defined Date 1 - 5, or the date
indicated by the Commitment Date Method from the Item/Branch Master for each item. Prior to this
enhancement, the expiration date was always used.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Manufacturing Management

WIP Revaluation When Original Standard Cost is Zero [10 : 19-Apr-2023]


WIP Revaluation will now update work-in-process costs when beginning with no cost established. This
provides the ability to prevent artificial variances when costs have not been established prior to the time
of work order creation for a new production item.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Option to Prevent Negative Completions [1000 : 11-Apr-2023]


Previous enhancements to Work Order Completions program provided the ability to control almost all
work order and rate schedule transaction types. The one exception was that a negative completion
quantity was always allowed if it was less than or equal to the quantity already completed. With this
enhancement, a new processing option is added in the Work Order Completions program (P31114) and
Completions Workbench Program (P3119) that provides the ability to prevent negative work order
completion quantities.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 178 of 202
Automatic Update of Outside Operation Purchase Orders [1010 : 27-Jun-2023]
Outside operation purchase order quantities and dates can now be updated automatically to match
manufacturing work orders revisions. Prior to this enhancement, manual intervention was required which
took time and allowed for data entry errors.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2023

OCI AI/ML Accelerator for JDE [1020 : 04-Dec-2023]


JD Edwards customers can now leverage the capabilities of AI/ML to address their business challenges
by leveraging the AI/ML Accelerator for JD Edwards.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: 1) Provides a quick start to customers looking to leverage AI/ML for solving their business
challenges.
2) Helps customers identify patterns and correlations.
3) Provides prebuilt and pretrained machine learning models.
4) Can be customized to individual business cases.
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Automatic Service or Equipment Work Order Routing Attachment Through ETO Project
Workbench [1030 : 27-Oct-2023]
Service or equipment work order routings can now be automatically attached when the work orders are
created through the ETO Project Workbench, eliminating the manual efforts that were required earlier.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:OCTOBER 2023

Project Manufacturing Usability Enhancements [110 : 11-May-2023]


* Provide the ability to track the project based on Business Unit
* Provide the ability to have the Production Number default into the Memo Lot 1 field to allow use of the
Lot field in Completions for a serial number.
* Provide ability to review lot status within the Production Number Workbench
* Provide the ability to re-assign supply to generic.
* Provide the ability to re-assigned with a single button/row exit/etc.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: * Improve usability within the new Project Manufacturing programs
* Significant Gains in User Productivity and Efficiency

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Manufacturing Management [150 : 01-May-2017]

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 179 of 202
JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design
philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that provides the information you need to know at a glance with
alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway directly into the applications you need to use, when you
need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Manufacturing Management:
- Plant Manager
- Production Manager
- Production Scheduler
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Manufacturing Accounting Decimal Precision [160 : 14-Jul-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides a way for users to improve or eliminate rounding variances. With
this solution, fields for unaccounted units that are used for manufacturing accounting will store greater
decimal precision values, eliminating erroneous production cost rounding variances and discrepancies
between the Item Ledger and General Ledger.
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing

Activity Rules for Manufacturing Work Orders [180 : 04-Jun-2021]


Users' ability to manually change work order statuses can result in data integrity issues (For example,
changing the status back to open and performing transactions after variance accounting has been
completed).
Adding activity rules for manufacturing work orders enforces adherence to an established process flow,
preventing erroneous status updates and transactions that aren't allowed based on status.

The work order activity rules functionality for manufacturing provides:


• A Manufacturing Constants control to turn on Work Order Activity Rules for a specific branch. This
ensures that there is no disruption for customers who don't need this new functionality and also provides
a smooth transition as rules would not be turned on until the set up is complete.

• Set-up application for creating Order Type/Doc Type combination Work Order Activity Rules that
defines:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 180 of 202
- Beginning status, next statuses and other allowed statuses
- At what status to prevent changes to the work order header, parts list and routing
- At what status to freeze work orders to prevent requirements planning action messages

• Work order status validation and locking per Activity Rules. With the Activity Rules Flag in
Manufacturing Constants set to 'Y':
- Status changes are validated against activity rules, when an update status is specified that is not in
the status flow, a hard error is generated
- Beginning status is retrieved from activity rules if none is specified in a processing option
- Status is updated according to activity rules if '*' is specified in a processing option
- Reports - When specified new status is not in the status flow, the record is printed on an exception
report and not processed
- Changes to work order header, parts list, and routing are prevented according to Lock Flag setting
- Freeze Code is updated to 'Y' according to Lock Flag setting
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: Activity rules will provide users with better control over the rate schedule and work order
status flow for manufacturing, eliminating inefficient processes, workarounds, or custom code
requirements.

Application to View Bill of Material Changes [190 : 28-Oct-2021]


When Log Bill of Material is turned on in Manufacturing Constants, history records are created in the Bill
of Material Changes File (F3011). The Bill of Material Change History (P3011) application is added to
enable the user to conveniently review the bill of material change history without using the Data Browser
or a custom report.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of June 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Work Order Ledger for Manufacturing Work Orders [210 : 04-Jun-2021]


New fields have been added to the Work Order Activity Rules (P4826) for manufacturing to trigger
entries into ledger tables at selected statuses when work order records are added or changed (header,
parts list, or routing).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: The Work Order Ledger feature allows for the tracking of work order changes to satisfy
auditing or regulatory requirements.

Ability to Change Contract Header and Contract Block End Dates to an Earlier Date [220 : 18-Jun-
2021]
The Grower Contract Header (P43C01) and Contract Block (P43C10) programs have been modified to
enable the user to change a contract end date to an earlier date which is later than any existing Contract
Harvest date.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: The ability to move a contract end date to an earlier date provides the flexibility to update a

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 181 of 202
contract accordingly when the conditions of the contract are met sooner than expected.

Ability to Edit Planted Area Field for the Harvest Records [230 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Block and Harvest programs have been modified to enable the user to edit the Planted Area field
after a grower operation has been created. This modification enables customers to handle the
fluctuations for a planted area due to various reasons.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: The ability to edit the Planted Area field after a grower operation has been created, eliminates
the need to create new block and harvest records to account for changes in the planted area due to
natural disasters such as fire, tornados, and so on.

Allow Harvest Dates to Overlap [240 : 18-Jun-2021]


The Grower Management system has been enhanced to allow the start date and end date of a harvest
record to overlap with the dates of another harvest record for the same block. Therefore, customers will
no longer have to wait until all operations are complete for the current harvest associated with a given
block of land, and can begin operations in preparation for the next harvest for the same block.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Enable Batch Replenishment Programs to Validate Lot Status Groups [30 : 13-Jan-2023]
JD Edwards now gives its users the flexibility to configure the system to validate lot groups at the time of
batch replenishment processing with the enhanced Fixed Location Replenishment (R461601) and
Replenishment to Random Locations (R461602) programs.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Record All Component Units in the Component Unit of Measure [30 : 11-Apr-2023]
The Units fields in the Production Cost table that indicate component item quantities will now always be
populated based on the Component Unit of Measure defined in the Item Master. This eliminates
potential confusion when inventory issues of the same item are made to a work order in different units of
measure.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Work Order Start Date Sync Option [40 : 11-Apr-2023]


Work Order Processing now includes the option to automatically sync the work order header start date
to match the start date of the first operation of the routing when it is attached if the calculated dates were
different. This will ensure correct and consistent start dates when work centers on routings have work
hours that differ from the manufacturing constants.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 182 of 202
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

New Where Used Diagram [520 : 13-Oct-2021]


Engineering, document control, and production planning personnel can now take advantage of the new
Where Used Diagram that provides an overview of an item's where used product data through a
modern, user-friendly diagram with images, ensuring easy access to item details and convenient
context-based exits to related applications. This diagram replaces the previously delivered Where Used
Diagram and eliminates the need for installation and configuration of a separate server.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Branch-Specific Master Routings for Product Costing Programs [530 : 20-Jul-2021]


Costing programs previously did not support branch/plant specific master routings. With this update, the
costing programs, Cost Simulation (R30812), Frozen Cost Update (R30835), Costing Exceptions
(R30801), and the Costed Routing Inquiry (P30208) will support branch-specific master routings the
same as all other manufacturing programs that use the master routing cross-reference.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of December 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Prevent Obsolete Item Entry on Bills of Material and Engineering Change Order Parts List [600 :
20-Jul-2021]
An error message will now be received when an attempt is made to enter items that are coded as
obsolete (stocking type O or U) in a bill of material or an ECO parts list. Prior to this enhancement, entry
was allowed in spite of an obsolete stocking type.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of February 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing

Preconfigured Notifications for Product Data Management [610 : 09-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Product Data Management. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 183 of 202
Copy Bill of Material Functionality [620 : 20-Jul-2021]
The Copy Bill of Material by Branch/Plant program (R3002CPY) can be used to copy bills of material
from one branch to another including Item/Branch and primary Item/Location records as required. Bills of
material are copied one level at a time based on data selection, and when a BOM already exists for an
item in the 'to' branch, it will not be altered in any way.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of October 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Fixed Time Basis Code for Work Order Routing [630 : 20-Jul-2021]
For production operations such as heat treating or plating, the work center run time may not vary
according to the quantity being processed. This feature adds a new time basis code value of "0" that
enables users to specify fixed hours which will be used by the system for scheduling, planning, costing,
and accounting.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Copy Costs to Multiple Selected Branch/Plants [640 : 09-May-2023]


The Copy Cost programs (R30890 & R308901) now provide the ability to copy costs to multiple selected
branches using a new Branch/Plant Selection application (P30890). Before this enhancement, the
programs only allowed you to specify one Branch/Plant to copy to or all branches that the item exists in.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Simplified Addition or Update of Item Cost Components [650 : 20-Jul-2021]


This feature significantly reduces the time it takes to add or update cost extras. A new interoperability
program has been provided so that updates can be performed for multiple items cost component
information at once rather than item by item.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of June 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Consolidation of Parts List Component Quantities when Copying by Work Order [680 : 20-Jul-
2021]
The Work With Manufacturing Work Order program (P48013) has been enhanced to consolidate parts
list quantities by item number, operation sequence number, and component branch when copying a
previous work order's parts list.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of March 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: Eliminates having multiple entries for the same lot/serial number controlled components or
components that were issued from many locations for the copy from work order.

Enhanced Shortage Report [690 : 20-Jul-2021]


A processing option has been added to the Work Order Component Shortage Report (R31418) to

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 184 of 202
consider inventory quantities from all locations to calculate shortages. Prior to this enhancement, the
report was always based only on quantities hard-committed from specific locations defined on the parts
lists. This enhancement can provide planners and buyers with a more complete picture of production
shortage conditions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Quantity Restrictions for Work Order and Rate Schedule Completions [700 : 20-Jul-2021]
New processing options have been added to the Work Order Completions (P31114) and the Rate
Schedule Completions Workbench (P3119) applications that allow control of completion quantities.
System administrators can now completely prevent partial completions and over completions beyond a
specified percentage.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Work Order Bill of Material and Routing Type Default Selection [720 : 20-Jul-2021]
New processing options have been added to enable defaulting bill of material and routing types other
than the standard 'M' type when entering a manufacturing work order (P48013). Prior to this
enhancement users had to manually overwrite the bill of material and routing type if they wanted to use
something other than the standard.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of December 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Option to Exclude Scrap When Determining Work Order Status [730 : 20-Jul-2021]
Make-to-order manufacturers often need the work order status to be based only on completed
quantities, without considering scrap quantities. The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Shop Floor
Management system has been updated with a new processing option in the Work Order Completions
program to specify whether scrap quantities are included when determining if a work order is complete.
Prior to this enhancement, work orders were always updated to the specified complete status code
when the quantity completed plus the quantity scrapped was greater than or equal to the quantity
ordered (or ordered x threshold %).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Inbound Work Order Interoperability [740 : 30-Sep-2021]


To facilitate integration with external systems, the standard JD Edwards inbound interoperability
functionality has been added to the existing interoperability application (P4801Z1) to import work order
information. Prior to this enhancement, only outbound was supported.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of April 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Simplified Update of Work Center Rates [750 : 20-Oct-2021]


You can now use an interactive standalone application for mass update of work center rates. Prior to

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 185 of 202
this enhancement, the update process was time consuming and required many clicks, as you had to
update work center rates one at a time for each cost method. This new work center rate revision
application will enable mass simulated rate updates.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of May 2021)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Work Order Business Services - Completions [760 : 20-Jul-2021]


The Manufacturing Work Order Business Services were released in 9.1 update 2 and allowed inbound
and outbound work order processes. This project expands the business services to include Work Order
Completions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previous released February 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: Allows a standard interface for work orders to connect to other Oracle or 3rd party products.
For manufacturers, this feature provides the ability to send and receive discrete work orders, their
associated parts list, and routing information to RFID processors, MES providers or other 3rd party
programs. This feature provides an additional integration point to input work order completion
transactions and to report number of end items completed, scrapped, as well as their location and lot
information.

Work Center Load Review Calendar [770 : 20-Jul-2021]


The Work Center Load Review Calendar provides daily, weekly, and monthly calendar views of
scheduled operations by work center with remaining available capacity displayed in an intuitive graphical
format for each work day in real time. Direct access to operation details, and convenient exits to inquiry
and maintenance applications facilitate scheduling decisions and adjustments.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The graphical real-time display of load versus capacity combined with easy access to
additional details and applications required for updates allows users to more efficiently establish viable
production schedules.

Manufacturing Work Order Business Services [780 : 11-May-2023]


Provide interfaces to import/export work orders within the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system. Four
interfaces will provide add, update, inquiry capability for Manufacturing work orders, service work orders,
equipment work orders and tenant work orders. This includes parts list and work order routing
information in addition to the work order header information.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Integration Industry: Manufacturing
Benefits: Allows a standard interface for work orders to connect to other Oracle or 3rd Party products.
For manufacturers, this provides the ability to send and receive discrete work orders their associated
Parts List, and work order routing information to RFID processors, MES providers or other third party
programs.

New Scheduled Work Order Operations [930 : 09-May-2023]


Production scheduling is made significantly more efficient by a new work order scheduling application

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 186 of 202
that displays all scheduled operations along with the available capacity, graphically in a Gantt chart, at
every work center required to complete a work order. The remaining capacity is displayed daily in either
green or red; red indicating an overcapacity condition. Dragging and dropping any operation to a new
date triggers an update to the work order requested date and initiates a reschedule of the parts list and
routing accordingly, with the effects of any change made immediately visible. This replaces the
previously delivered Scheduled Work Order Operations program and eliminates the need for installation
and configuration of a separate server.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

New Work Center Load Review [940 : 09-May-2023]


Production scheduling is made significantly more efficient by the Work Center Load Review application
which provides graphical views of the scheduled operations by work center and displays the remaining
available capacity in an intuitive format for each work day in real time. Direct access to operation details
and convenient exits to inquiry and update applications facilitate scheduling decisions and adjustments.
This replaces the previously delivered Work Center Load Review program and eliminates the need for
installation and configuration of a separate server.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2022

Default Work Order Routing Operation Status for Outside Processing Receipts [950 : 19-Oct-
2022]
The Operation Status field in the Routing Quantities and Status window can now be populated
automatically by the system when performing purchase order receipts for production work order outside
operations. The default values for partial and complete receipt quantities are defined in new processing
options. This automated status update eliminates potential human oversite or error and speeds up the
receiving process.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Option to Print Component Item Substitutes [960 : 19-Oct-2022]


A processing option has been added to the Bill of Material Print application (R30460) to specify whether
this report includes the substitutes defined in bills of material. Prior to this enhancement, substitutes
were never included which potentially presented an incomplete picture of product component options.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Option to Exclude Scrap when Determining Work Order Operation Status [970 : 13-Jan-2023]
Make-to-order manufacturers often need the work order operation statuses to be based only on
completed quantities, without regard to scrapping. A new processing option had been added previously
to the Work Order Completions program (P31114) to specify whether scrap quantities are included while
determining work order completion. Now, that processing option will also be considered when

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 187 of 202
completing work order operations via Super Backflush (P31123) to update operation statuses. Prior to
this enhancement, operation statuses were always updated to the specified complete status code when
the quantity completed plus the quantity scrapped was greater than or equal to the quantity ordered.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2023

Kanban Status Override [980 : 11-Apr-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne now includes the Kanban Status Override program that provides the ability
to bypass standard Kanban processing and update Kanban card statuses for corrective purposes. Prior
to this enhancement, the ability to reset a Kanban Status in case of an erroneous transaction was not
available.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Using Active Blank Batch Quantity Product Definition [990 : 11-Apr-2023]


When a work order for a quantity that has an out of effect batch BOM or routing is processed, the active
blank batch quantity bill of material, or routing, or both, for the manufactured item is attached. Prior to
this enhancement, the system did not consider a blank batch quantity product definition when the
specified batch quantity definition existed with all effective dates in the past or future and generated a
hard error.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing
Notes: ReleaseDate:APRIL 2023

Quality Management

Copy Quality Tests [10 : 11-May-2023]


Copy the test results from one location and lot to another at the time of work order completions,
purchase order receipts, receipt routing and inventory movements.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: Some organizations need to store test results by lot number only. This enhancement allows
those customers to store test results based on lot by allowing the ability to copy test results from one
location to another.

Serial Number Selection for Test Results Entry [100 : 02-Jun-2021]


When you exit from the Hours and Quantities (P311221) program or the Super Backflush (P31123)
program to the Test Results Entry (P3711) program, if serial numbers are already assigned to the work
order, they will now be displayed in the Assigned Serial Numbers (P3105) program so that you can
select one of them. Prior to this update, for every item with a Lot Process Type of 5 or 6, a new serial

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 188 of 202
number was automatically generated for Test Results Entry even if serial numbers were already
assigned to the work order.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Default Current User As Tester When Entering Test Results [110 : 09-May-2023]
The Test Results Entry application has been updated to allow for the address book number of the
current user to default into the tester field. Prior to this enhancement, the system enabled you to default
in only a single specified address book number or none at all.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JUNE 2022

Enhanced Certificate of Analysis [80 : 20-Oct-2020]


The Certificate of Analysis (R37460) that you can generate when using Quality Management has been
enhanced to include Lot Expiration Date by default. Optionally, you can also include other lot information
based on the new processing options that have been added. Prior to this enhancement, the Certificate
of Analysis included the tests performed and results for a given lot but was missing some potentially
important lot information.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Enforce Test Results Entry [90 : 02-Jun-2021]


Prior to this enhancement, an inspector or test technician was always allowed to exit Test Results
Revisions (P3711) without entering test results. A new setting has been added to the Test Revisions
(P3701) program and the Quality Management Preference Profile (P40318) program to make test result
entry mandatory. When set, the system generates an error if result values are left blank when test
results are called for.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 189 of 202
USABCO 9.1 and 9.2 Release comparison
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
Architectural Layer: Applications
Release From: 9.1 Release To: 9.2 Update 8
Component(s): Introduction, Asset Lifecycle Management, Financial Management, Manufacturing,
Order Management, Project Management, Supply Chain Execution (Logistics), Supply Management
(Procurement), System Foundation, One View Reporting, Mobile Enterprise Applications, In-Memory
Applications, Tools, Integrations, CDK and OBA, Localization, Mobile ADF Browser Smartphone
Applications, User Experience

Order Management
Advanced Pricing

Data Quality for Advanced Pricing Applications [350 : 11-May-2023]


Data quality includes adding record reservation to applications within the Advanced Pricing module:
- Order and Basket Level Repricing (R42750)
- Sales Order Basket Price/Cost Update (R42950)
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Advanced Pricing Performance Improvements [360 : 11-May-2023]


Enable filtering on pricing records and specify the action in the Accelerated Pricing Resolution Engine
program which enables records to be loaded more quickly and efficiently into the cached memory.

Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2


Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - More efficient loading and reloading of records.
- Expired records not loaded which results in less data in the cache.

Additonal Flexibility for Order Repricing [370 : 11-May-2023]


Enable the ability to create amount and weight level discounts that can be applied to an entire sales
order without using an order reprice group.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Manufacturing and Distribution
Benefits: - Additional flexibility to order level discounts
- Simpler set up of discounts
Examples: Purchase $500 USD total, receive a 5% discount on the full order

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Advanced Pricing [410 : 17-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 190 of 202
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Advanced Pricing:
- Sales Pricing Operations Manager
- Procurement Pricing Operations Manager
- Strategic Pricing Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Basket Pricing for Procurement [430 : 06-Jul-2021]


Basket-Level Pricing in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Procurement system will help users to apply the
correct prices and discounts in an automated manner with the most current and accurate pricing
information. Using existing Advanced Pricing functionality, users set up adjustment definitions and
schedules that can be used to apply basket pricing to purchase orders and receipts. New functionality
enables users to automatically and interactively apply basket-level adjustments to purchase orders, and
to use a batch process to apply basket-level pricing to purchase orders and receipts.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Preconfigured Notifications for Advanced Pricing [440 : 19-Feb-2019]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Advanced Pricing. Your users can
subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them for
your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM
Release Comparison Report Page 191 of 202
Item Number Filter for the Supplier Catalog Maintenance Program (P41061) [450 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Supplier Catalog Maintenance program (P41061) has been modified to include an Item Number
filter that enables users to search for a specific item associated with the supplier catalog. When using
this filter, the system will load only the filtered item into the Supplier Catalog Revisions form.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of May 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: By reducing the number of records on the revision form, users can make updates without
having to scroll through numerous records of other items associated with the supplier catalog.

Rounding Adjustment Support for Service & Warranty Management [460 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Price Adjustment Type program (P4071) has been modified to support the Rounding Adjustment
option when Service & Warranty Management is selected as a target application on the Modify Adj.
Controls form. With this modification, you can now use the rounding rules in the Price Adjustment Detail
Revisions program (P4072) to support Service Contracts, Service Work Orders, Case Management, and
Warranty Claims programs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of August 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Item Base Price Interoperability [470 : 18-Jun-2021]


The Sales Order Management system includes new functions that enable you to:
- Import item base prices received from external systems into the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne base price
system
- Receive, review, and revise inbound price changes through an interface application
- Purge transaction records from the interface tables
Additionally, an option is provided to purge the processed transactions from the interoperability interface
by using the Purge Item Price Records program (R4106Z1P).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This enhancement enables pricing managers to perform a mass update of base prices when
the price change is not based on a fixed percentage or fixed amount. Having the ability to receive,
review, and revise pricing data from external sources improves efficiency and ensures that customers
can offer timely competitive pricing in accordance with market conditions.

Order Level Pricing in Procurement [480 : 06-Jul-2021]


Suppliers often offer discounts on the total value of the purchase order, such as a flat rate of 2% when
the total order amount exceeds a certain dollar value. Suppliers also add freight costs and carriage
charges based on the total weight of the purchase order. To incorporate these discounts or costs,
procurement clerks had to manually compute these amounts, and add the amounts to the purchase
order as a separate line, because order-level pricing was not supported by the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Procurement module. With this feature, the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Procurement
system now leverages the Order Level Adjustment capabilities available in the JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne Advanced Pricing module and provides users the ability to apply discounts or costs at a
purchase order level.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of November 2020)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 192 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Purchasing organizations can eliminate manual computation and entry of the discounts or
costs to the purchase order. This, in turn, improves the accuracy of the order amounts and significantly
saves time.

Volume-Level Pricing in Procurement [490 : 13-Oct-2021]


As purchasing organizations, your suppliers may reward you for buying from them in larger quantities.
You can now take advantage of these volume-based discounts offered by your suppliers by leveraging
the volume-level adjustment option that has been enabled for Procurement in the JD Edwards Advanced
Pricing module. With this enhancement, you can apply volume-based discounts for items over multiple
purchase orders. As the discounts are computed in an automated manner, volume level pricing
improves the accuracy of the price information in the purchase orders thereby making the purchasing
process more effective and efficient.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)

Standalone Check Price in Procurement [500 : 06-Dec-2023]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne enhances its Advanced Pricing module to enable its customers review the
line level adjustments in standalone mode at any point in time in the procurement process.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Volume-Based Buying Recommendations in Procurement [510 : 06-Dec-2023]


The JD Edwards Advanced Pricing system for Procurement now automatically notifies you that a
different level break can be achieved by increasing the quantity ordered by a specific percentage while
entering a purchase order. The system dynamically identifies all buying opportunities to reduce the item
cost and notifies you to increase the quantity to get a better discount on the item. This makes the
purchasing process efficient.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:NOVEMBER 2023

Agreement Management

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Agreement Management [10 : 17-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 193 of 202
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Agreement Management:
- Sales Agreement Manager
- Procurement Agreement Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Agreement Validation for Partners on Hold [20 : 18-Jun-2021]


The Agreement Master program (P38010) and the Outbound Inventory Agreement Master program
(P42I010) have been enhanced with options to validate whether an agreement partner has been placed
on hold. This enhancement enables you to specify whether the system displays an error or continues to
process the agreement set up for partners that have been placed on hold.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of July 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Having the ability to validate whether a partner has been placed on hold helps you to manage
your agreement management process and minimize potential risks to your business.

Ability to Change Agreement Expiration Date to an Earlier Date [30 : 13-Oct-2021]


The Agreement Master program (P38010) has been enhanced to enable you to change the agreement
expiration date to an earlier date.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to change the expiration date to an earlier date helps you manage your agreement
management process and minimize potential risks to your business.

Fulfillment Management

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Fulfillment Management [100 : 17-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 194 of 202
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Fulfillment Management:
- Fulfillment Manager
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

New Shipment Number Created for Unreleased Lines [90 : 09-Apr-2015]


The Oracle JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Fulfillment Management system provides an efficient way to
commit inventory among the open sales orders based on priority ranking.

During the release process, any sales order lines that meet the criteria are soft committed and released
from fulfillment. Any other sales orders which do not satisfy the criteria remain in the fulfillment process
and receive a new shipment number.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released April 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: Distribution
Benefits: Customers can ship their available items on time and accurately while still maintaining the
remaining items on a new shipment.

Sales Order Management

Data Quality for Sales Applications [160 : 11-May-2023]


Data quality includes adding transaction processing to applications within the Sales Order Management
module:
- Print Pick Slips (R42520)
- Repost Active Sales Orders (R42995)
- Inventory Commitment (R42997)
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Data Quality for Sales Applications [170 : 11-May-2023]


Data quality includes adding transaction processing to applications within the Sales Order Management
module:
- Credit Hold Batch (R42542)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 195 of 202
- Release Credit Holds (R42950)
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Credit Order Processing in Sales Order Entry [180 : 11-May-2023]


Create credit orders to reverse an existing sales order using the Sales Order Entry application (P42101)
and sales history information.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:
Benefits: - Increase productivity of customer service personnel.
- Eliminate the need to change programs to create a credit order for a customer.

Credit Checking Performance [190 : 11-May-2023]


Credit checking is used to place sales orders on hold when customer's credit limit is reached. This
process uses multiple table fetches to arrive at the credit limit for a customer, this is an iterative and
recursive process and can have performance impacts when performing credit checking with parent/child
relationships.
Change: Added in Release 9.1 Update 2
Status: Planned Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Improve performance for all applications that call the credit checking functionality: Sales
Order Entry, Inbound EDI, Batch Credit Hold, Credit Check, and Batch Credit Hold Release.

Business Interface Build-out to Support Oracle Sales Cloud [300 : 18-Apr-2015]


This enhancement supports the following features:
- One-way synchronization of customer information from Oracle Sales Cloud to JD Edwards
EnterpriseOne
- One-way synchronization of item information from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to Oracle Sales Cloud
- User interfaces of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne embedded in the Oracle Sales Cloud user interface to
support the creation of quote and sales orders.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released July 2014)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This feature enables JD Edwards EnterpriseOne customers to take advantage of Oracle
Sales Cloud to increase sales success, target higher quality opportunities, and shorten time to revenue.
With standard JD Edwards EnterpriseOne business interfaces customers experience rapid ROI and co-
existence between the front office and back office.

Real-Time Summarization: Sales Order Entry [310 : 18-Apr-2015]


In the Sales Order Entry program, you can use real-time summarization to quickly review aggregated
totals, instead of scrolling to the end of the grid to review the totals.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (previously released February 2015)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Increase visibility of sales order demand within a company

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 196 of 202
Understand customer demand by accessing quantity balances by customer, item, business unit, and
unit of measure

UX One: Role-Based Solutions for Sales Order Management [320 : 17-Nov-2021]


JD Edwards UX One is the latest advancement of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience
centering around the Alert, Analyze, Act
design principles. Using the Alert, Analyze, Act design philosophy, we deliver a simplified UI that
provides the information you need to know at a glance with alerts and analytics. It also offers a gateway
directly into the applications you need to use, when you need to use them.

These UX One solutions leverage native JD Edwards, ADF, and JET technologies for a superior,
intuitive user experience across the broad
portfolio of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne products.

The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user experience - UX One - provides the following role-based solutions
for Sales Order Management:
- Customer Service Manager
- Customer Service Representative
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This feature delivers a role-based user experience that makes it easy for users in specific job
areas to see and act upon important information quickly. The interface is easy to adopt, is configurable,
and can be personalized to meet the requirements of your business. The interface enables workers to
be more efficient by presenting them with the information that they need to make fast, informed
decisions, and then act on them.
User Experience: Users of enterprise systems have increased expectations for the user experience.
These expectations are driven by technology they have grown used to using in their personal lives. The
UX One role-based solutions provide an intuitive interface that uses the Alert, Analyze, Act paradigm,
which
enables workers in specific roles to be more efficient at their jobs.

Sales Order Entry - Order Guides [330 : 08-Dec-2016]


Sales Order Entry includes Order Guides that allow customer service representatives to quickly create
orders for customers they interact with regularly and for items that are commonly ordered. The ability to
create templates of items by customer and to associate customers with customer service
representatives provides easy access to this information during sales order entry. In addition, within the
Order Guides interface, relevant background information about the customer is provided including credit
history and previous ordering patterns to ensure the customers' needs are filled.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2016)
Status: Available Type: Industry: Distribution

Accounting Entries for In Transit Goods [340 : 21-Jun-2018]


You can create journal entries for sold goods that are in transit by setting processing options in the Ship
Confirmation program (P4205).
Change: Added in Release 9.2
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 197 of 202
Refresh Inventory Commitments [350 : 15-Nov-2021]
You can use the Refresh Inventory Commitments program (P42990) to clear all commitments for items
for which no active sales order exists. When you run the program, it clears quantities from the F41021
table and then resets the quantities in certain fields based on the soft commitments for work orders.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2017)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: Enabling inventory commitment refresh for all items will help :
• Improve inventory planning and forecast accuracy
• Maintain proper data integrity between the Item Balance and sales orders
• Provide accurate visibility into the inventory commitments
Examples: Occasionally, due to various system issues such as system failure, the quantities that
appear as committed in the Item Balance (F41021), do not match with the open sales orders. Inaccurate
commitments impact the bottom line of enterprises by costly production delays and in turn delayed
shipments. Overstocked items as well as out-of-stock items in inventory can be devastating to the
business. You can run the Refresh Inventory Commitments program to keep your commitments up to
date.

Preconfigured Notifications for Sales Order Management [360 : 10-Apr-2018]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Notifications simplify, streamline, and optimize your business processes by
enabling you to stay in touch with your business and ERP system whether you are at your desk or on
the go. Notifications enable you to work with processes and data at the tempo of your business by
detecting and alerting you to important events or conditions based on JD Edwards business data or
external systems. They also improve business efficiency by proactively alerting your users and by
providing improved visibility, thus saving cost and time.

JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered notification content for Sales Order Management. Your users
can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can personalize them
for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your specific business
needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of April 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Additional Preconfigured Notifications for Sales Order Management [370 : 19-Feb-2019]


JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has delivered additional notification content for Sales Order Management.
Your users can subscribe to these notifications out of the box and your notification designers can
personalize them for your unique use cases or use them to seed new ideas for notifications for your
specific business needs.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of November 2018)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Automatically Return Pick Date from ATP/CATP [380 : 26-Jan-2022]


The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne sales order entry process is enhanced to enable the automatic
populating of Available to Promise (ATP) and Cumulative Available to Promise (CATP) sales order dates
without having to access the Supply and Demand Inquiry form.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 198 of 202
When creating a sales order, the user can enter the quantity of an item in the sales order line and move
to the next line without entering any dates. The system uses the ATP and CATP calculation (according
to the specified version of Supply and Demand Inquiry (P4021) program) and returns the Scheduled
Pick Date to the sales order line. The ship and delivery dates are calculated and populated based on the
pick date. If there are no dates on which the quantity available is sufficient to meet the demand, the
Supply and Demand Inquiry opens.

The ability to return pick date automatically is enabled when:


•A new sales order is created
•An existing sales order is edited (Request Date or Quantity)
•An order is created or updated through EDI
•A sales order line is split (Partial Shipments, Inventory Commitments)
•An order is released from future commitment
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of July 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: The automatic return of pick date from ATP or CATP sales order dates eliminates the need to
access the Supply and Demand Inquiry form every time you need to calculate the delivery date.
The automatic return of pick date also eliminates the need of a custom code.

Record Reservation for the Print Delivery Notes Program (R42535) [400 : 26-Jan-2022]
The JDEdwards EnterpriseOne software now provides record reservation functionality for the Print
Delivery Notes program (R42535). Record reservation ensures the integrity of the data and prevents
data loss. The system reserves (locks) a Sales Order for processing, to prevent simultaneous
processing of the Sales Order by any other program. The system does not allow you to edit a record that
has been locked by a different user or application.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of September 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Print Pick Slips by Requested Date (R42520) [410 : 18-Jun-2021]


The system by default assigns the pick slip number by order number. The Print Pick Slips Program
(R42520) now enables users to print pick slips by requested date also.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of August 2019)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Improved Data Quality between Item Ledger and Account Ledger [420 : 26-Jan-2022]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system includes two new DMAAIs, 4226 (ZBA - Inventory) and 4228
(Expense or COGS) to create G/L journal entries for cost adjustments when the on-hand quantity goes
to zero through the Sales Order Management system while there is still a cost in the G/L. The inclusion
of these DMAAIs resolves the integrity issue between the Item Ledger File table (F4111) and Account
Ledger table (F0911).
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of February 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This enables JD Edwards customers to avoid creating manual GL entries for zero balance
adjustment for the transactions that comes from the Sales Order Management system.

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 199 of 202
Currency Exchange Rate Calculation Date [430 : 26-Jan-2022]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Sales Order Batch Price/Cost Update program (R42950) has been
enhanced to consider the exchange rate based on the current system date or the invoice date when the
price is recalculated for a sales order line.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (as of January 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: This provides the JD Edwards customers greater flexibility to recalculate the price by
considering the exchange rate based on either the system date or the invoice date according to their
unique business requirements.

Cycle Billing for Sales Orders—Separate G/L Entries for Price Adjustments and Detached
Adjustments [440 : 26-Jan-2022]
The Cycle Billing program (R49700) now includes two processing options that enable you to create
separate deferred G/L entries for price adjustments and detached adjustments for sales order
transactions.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of October 2020)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: This functionality provides visibility to deferred revenue and unbilled A/R entries for price
adjustments and detached adjustments on a sales order line.

Item Cost Retrieval from Item Cost File (F4105) for a Copied Sales Order [450 : 26-Jan-2022]
When a sales order is copied, the unit cost for the item in the sales order is also copied. With this
enhancement, when a sales order is copied, the system retrieves the unit cost from the Item Cost File
(F4105) instead of retaining the item cost from the copied sales order.
Benefit: Retrieving the item cost from the Item Cost File ensures that the accurate cost is applied for the
new sales order and data integrity issues are minimized.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of October 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Ability to Edit Price Fields for Blanket and Quote Orders [460 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Sales Order Entry program (P4210) has been enhanced to allow users the option to edit the price
fields on sales orders released from sales blanket orders and sales quote orders.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)
Status: Available Type: Industry:
Benefits: Sales and customer service personnel can modify the price in real-time when engaged with
customers to negotiate price.

Standard Cost Integrity Between General Ledger and Item Ledger [470 : 18-Jun-2021]
The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system has been updated to maintain integrity between the General
Ledger (F0911) and the Item Ledger (F4111) after creating an order from history and changing the
standard cost. If the standard cost is changed after ship confirmation, the Sales Update program
(R42800) retrieves the new standard cost value from the Item Ledger File (F4111) during processing.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of September 2020)

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 200 of 202
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Summation of the Extended Amount Column for Sales Order Entry (P42101) [480 : 18-Jun-2021]
The Sales Order Entry Program (P42101) now includes the ability to summarize the Extended Amount
column. With this enhancement, you can see the total of the sales order at the bottom of the data grid
when inquiring on a sales order.
Change: Added in Release 9.2 (As of March 2021)
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry:

Backorder Release and Report Program to Consider Production Number when Releasing
Backordered Items [490 : 13-Oct-2021]
The Backorder Release and Report program (R42118) has been enhanced to allow the system to
review and consider the production number associated with available inventories while releasing
backordered items to sales orders. With this enhancement, customers have better control over inventory
allocation while eliminating data integrity issues associated with the backorder release process.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Enable Advanced Pricing to Calculate Price and Cost for Intercompany Orders [500 : 15-Nov-
2021]
The Sales Order Entry program (P4210) has been enhanced to allow the use of the Advanced Pricing
functionality to calculate the price and cost used for intercompany orders. Specifically, a new processing
option is available on the Process tab to indicate whether the system applies a markup based on
Advanced Pricing. This enhancement provides additional pricing flexibility for intercompany orders while
eliminating the need for workarounds and customizations.
Change: Added in Release 22
Status: Available Type: Industry:

Ability to Filter Data by Next Status When Using the Work With RTE (Real-Time Event) Filter
Program (P4230) [510 : 21-Oct-2022]
The Work With RTE Filter program (P4230) has been enhanced to enable you to filter data by the next
status.
Change: Added in Release 23
Status: Available Type: Feature Industry: (All Industries)
Benefits: The ability to filter data by the next status enables you to ensure that during the EDI process,
you can filter out non-EDI order changes such as backorder release, pick slip print, and requested date
and not transmit this information through real-time events.

Ability to Recalculate Rebates Based on Original Currency Exchange Rate [520 : 21-Oct-2022]
Customers who do business internationally and offer customer rebates, occasionally run the Repost
Sales Rebate History program to ensure customers get a rebate for orders after the fact. At the time of
the original sales order transaction, the current exchange rate in the Currency Exchange Rates (F0015)
table is applied to the sales order. However, when the exchange rate changes and updated to the F0015
table, the system uses the updated exchange rate when you run Repost Sales Rebate History. Thus, a

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 201 of 202
variance occurs because the recalculated rebate amount is not based on the exchange rate of the
original sales order.

The Repost Sales Rebate History program has been enhanced to allow you to configure the Repost
Sales History program to use the currency exchange rate from the original sales order when
recalculating rebates.

Benefits:

- Ability to recalculate rebates based on original exchange rate for orders


- Eliminates exchange rate variances between the Sales Order Detail (F4211), Rebate Transaction
Summary (F4078) and Rebate Transaction Detail (F4079) tables.

Change: Added in Release 23


Status: Available Type: Industry:

Order Preparation and Delivery Date Preference Based on Workday Calendar [530 : 12-Jan-2024]
JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Order Preparation Days preference has been enhanced to work in
conjunction with the Workday Calendar at the time of sales order entry. With this enhancement, the
system considers excluded days from the Workday Calendar to determine the scheduled pick date and
accurately calculate the order preparation days.
Change: Added in Release 24
Status: Available Type: Industry: (All Industries)
Notes: ReleaseDate:JANUARY 2024

Oracle Product Features Report Run On: 1/16/2024 8:08 AM


Release Comparison Report Page 202 of 202

You might also like